Manual Bomba Duckow

DICKOW PUMPEN KG / Pump Data Sheet - Pump with Shaft Seal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Order No.:
P.O. No.: 14EBE1736
PB14201782
Customer :
Buss-SMS-Canzler GmbH, Butzbach
Quantity :
Type :
1
NCL
s 32/210
Cust. Item No.:
Date :
P.O. Date :
Design :
Serial No.:
22.08.14 Week :
10.06.14
Dexd N13
PB14201782
34
Accessories
Motor manufacturer : ATB
Delivered by :
Type :
ISO-classif.:
Protection :
100L2
F
Output :
Voltage :
Frequency :
3,6 kW
440 V
Construction : B3
Thermistors : 3 pc.
VIK :
Frequency converter operation!
Coupling, Manuf./Type :
FLENDER ARPEX NAN 88-6/100
Base plate/frame :
5G
Assembled by :
Ex - classif.:
Terminal box :
Efficiency-class:
DICKOW
IP55
60 Hz
no
DICKOW
Exde II CT4
manufacturers standard
IE1
Guard material :
carb. st.
foundation bolts :
Thermosyphon vessel: acc. to 46.66
No. 50 1007
Name tag :
english
Execution
Pump flanges : Suct.: 2"
Impeller diam. :
Stages :
Ratg.: 300
198 mm
1
Impeller type : closed
Machined acc. to :
ASME RF
Circulation :
Bores, intermediate casing :
(1) no
Plan 53
(2) no
Casing mount :
Rotation :
foot
cw
Drain :
standard plug
Press. gauge conn.:
Nozzle orientation : standard
no
Self priming :
Painting : standard, RAL 9006
no
Heating jacket flange: Inlet DN/PN:
Outlet DN/PN:
Heating/Cooling : volute cas. :
intermed. cas.:
mech. seal :
Shaft seal :
Manufacturer : DICKOW
Double mech. seal
Inboard Type/Size :
Material :
N13
U3U3GG1G
Outboard Type/Size :
Material :
N13
U2U2GG1G
Disch.:
1,5"
Ratg.: 300
Materials
Wetted casing: GGG 40.3 / carb. st Side chan. impeller:
Diffuser :
Imp. wear ring :
Impeller :
Pump shaft :
1.4408
1.4021
Wear ring :
1.4571
bearing bracket: GG 25
Support column :
Dome cover :
Gasket :
Graphite
Shaft sleeve :
Mech. seal casing:
Operating Data
Liquid :
Oil
Solids :
Flow liquid :
Flow water :
Vapour pressure :
max. operating temp.:
Temperature :
Head liquid :
Head water :
Speed :
max. operating press.:
yes
5 m3/h
300C
265 C
20 mLC
1750 rpm
< 10 bar
Density :
0,79 kg/l
Viscosity :
1 mm2/s
Power cons. liquid :
1,0 kW
Power cons. water :
max. power cons.:
Perf. curve : 64. NC.202
Tests
Material
Certificate: yes
EN 10204 2.1
Witnessed:
Hydrostatic
Performance
NPSH
Certificate: yes Witnessed:

Test Press.: 15 bar
Certificate: yes Witnessed:

ISO 9906-3B 5 point
Certificate:
Balancing
Vibration
Certificate:
Witnessed:
DIN/ISO 1940 T1 6.3
Certificate:
Witnessed:
Sound power
Witnessed:
Certificate:
ISO 9614-2
Witnessed:
Drawings, Build sheets, Documentation

Build sheet :
Documentation : No.: 1 / mail
23.NCL.353
Mech. seal build sheet :
23.NC.246/I
Comments :
Language: german / engl
EU-Language IOM: not EU
# Soot; Particle size 50 m, max. 1 mm

I.O.M. manual of pump in spanish language!
Cold start @ 40C: 75,6 mm2/s => Power rating 1,8 kW
Rev.B vom 02.07.14 VK/Hu/we
ATEX - ExII2GcX Kat.: 2 Tempkl.: T1 (05 ATEX D 015)
63
64 Handled by Hu
Date 17.06.14
Techn. verified
Date
Weights : net
total
Motor No.:
546441001 H
ATEX:
08 ATEX 1087 X
Comm. verified
Date
Operating / Installation Instructions

NCL
Nr. 44.NCL.E4.12/10
Original Manual
DICKOW PUMPEN KG
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1. General................................................................................................................................................. 4
2. Safety ................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Designation of Warning Notices .................................................................................................. 5
2.2 Intended use.................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Avoidance of foreseeable operating errors................................................................................... 7
2.4 Qualification of personnel ............................................................................................................ 7
2.5 Additional safety regulations........................................................................................................ 7
2.6 Safety instructions for the operator / user..................................................................................... 7
2.7 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and assembly ................................................... 8
2.8 Non-observance of the instruction manual................................................................................... 8
2.9 Notices on explosion protection ................................................................................................... 8
3. Description......................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 General discription ..................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 Design code ................................................................................................................................ 11
3.3 Classification pump size / frame size ......................................................................................... 11
3.4 Identification .............................................................................................................................. 12
3.5 Design......................................................................................................................................... 13
3.6 Scope of supply .......................................................................................................................... 13
3.7 Dimensions and Weights............................................................................................................ 14
4. Handling / Storage / Disposal ............................................................................................................ 15
4.1 Handling ..................................................................................................................................... 15
4.2 Storage / Preservation................................................................................................................. 16
4.3 Return of pump........................................................................................................................... 16
4.4 Disposal ...................................................................................................................................... 17
5. Installation / Mounting ...................................................................................................................... 18
5.1 Safety Instructions...................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 Foundation.................................................................................................................................. 18
5.3 Installation of pump unit ............................................................................................................ 18
5.4 Piping ......................................................................................................................................... 19
5.5 Insulation .................................................................................................................................... 22
5.6 Coupling alignment .................................................................................................................... 23
5.7 Alignment of pump and motor ................................................................................................... 24
5.8 Electrical connection of the pump unit....................................................................................... 25
6. Commissioning / Decommissioning.................................................................................................. 27
6.1 Commissioning........................................................................................................................... 27
6.2 Operating the pump .................................................................................................................... 31
6.3 Impeller trimming....................................................................................................................... 31
6.4
Operating limits......................................................................................................................... 32
6.5 Switching off the pump .............................................................................................................. 33
6.6 Decommissioning....................................................................................................................... 33
7. Maintenance / Servicing / Inspection ................................................................................................ 34
7.1 Safety regulations ....................................................................................................................... 34
7.2 Operating surveillance................................................................................................................ 35
7.3 Drainage and Disposal................................................................................................................ 37
7.4 Disassembly of pump unit.......................................................................................................... 37
7.5 Inspection ................................................................................................................................... 42
7.6 Assembly of pump unit .............................................................................................................. 43
7.7 Bolt torques ................................................................................................................................ 48
NCL E4.12.10
2 of 62
Table of Contents
8.
9.
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 49
Interchangeability .............................................................................................................................. 51
9.1 Frame size 0................................................................................................................................ 51
9.2 Frame size I ................................................................................................................................ 52
9.3 Frame size II............................................................................................................................... 53
9.4 Frame size III.............................................................................................................................. 54
9.5 Frame size IV ............................................................................................................................. 55
9.6 Frame size V............................................................................................................................... 56
10.
Sectional drawings ......................................................................................................................... 57
10.1 Pump........................................................................................................................................... 57
10.2 Mechanical seal .......................................................................................................................... 59
11.
Certificates ..................................................................................................................................... 61
11.1 EC-Declaration of Conformity...................................................................................................... 61
11.2 Document of Compliance........................................................................................................... 62
NCL E4.12.10
3 of 62
1. General
1. General
This instruction manual describes the proper and safe usage of the pump during all operating phases.
The instruction manual does not consider local regulations. Adherence to those is the responsibility of the
owner.
The name tag states pump type and size, the most important operating data as well as the pump serial
number. The serial number is a precise description of the pump unit and serves as identification for all
following procedures.
In the event of damage the Customer Service of Dickow Pumpen must immediately be informed in order
to maintain guarantee claims.
For installation of supplied interchangeable units, the respective subchapters of "Maintenance, Servicing,
Inspection" must be observed.
Applicable documents:
-
Pump data sheet

Dimensional drawing
Sectional drawing
Parts lists
Sub-supplier documentation
NCL E4.12.10
4 of 62
2. Safety
2. Safety
The manual includes basic instructions for installation, operation and maintenance. Only if these
instructions are strictly observed, a safe handling of pump or pump unit is guaranteed and personal injury
and material damage is avoided.
All the safety instructions in this manual must be considered.
This manual must be thoroughly reviewed and completely understood by the qualified personnel /
operator before attempting assembly and start-up.
The manual must consistently be available on site.
Indications and plates attached to the pump must be followed and kept in legible condition.
2.1
Designation of Warning Notices
Signal word
Explanation
DANGER
signifies an imminent danger.

If it will not be avoided, death or severe injury are the consequence.
WARNING
signifies a possibly dangerous situation.

If it will not be avoided, death or severe injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION

If it will not be avoided, slight or minor injury may be the consequence.
ATTENTION
signifies a possibly harmful situation.

If it will not be avoided, danger for the pump and its function may be the
consequence.
Symbol
Explanation
General danger sign
Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with death
or injury.
Dangerous voltage
Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with
voltage.
NCL E4.12.10
5 of 62
2. Safety
Warning from magnetic field

Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with
magnetic fields.
Hot surface
Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with hot
surfaces.
Explosion protection
Gives information on protection from explosion development in
hazardous area according to EC-Directive 94/9/EG.
Mechanical breakdown
Together with the signal word ATTENTION, it signifies dangers for the
pump and its function.
Notice
Provides recommendation and useful information for handling the
product.
2.2 Intended use

The pump / pump unit may only be operated in the application area which is described in the relevant
pump data sheet. This applies for instance to pumped liquid, flow, speed, pressure, temperature and motor
power. Further points to be observed:
Operate pump in technically faultless condition only.

Never operate pump if not completely assembled.
Never operate pump without liquid.
Observe the pump data sheet / operating manual regarding the minimum flow.
Observe the pump data sheet / operating manual regarding the maximum flow.
Never throttle pump on suction side.
Maximum speed is 2900 rpm (+10%) at 50 cycles and 3500 rpm (+10%) at 60 cycles.
NCL E4.12.10
6 of 62
2. Safety
2.3
Avoidance of foreseeable operating errors
Never open shut-off valves in excess of the allowable range. This would cause exceedance of the
maximum flow and possible cavitation damage.
Never exceed the allowable application limits regarding pressure and temperature which are specified
in the pump data sheet.
Consider and adhere to all safety instructions and other notices mentioned in the operating manual.
2.4
Qualification of personnel
The personnel must possess the relevant qualification for assembly, operation, maintenance and
inspection of the pump unit.
Responsibility, competence and supervision must be strictly regulated by the owner.
Skill of the personnel shall be improved by training. Training course can be held by the technical staff of
Dickow Pumpen.
2.5
Additional safety regulations
Besides the safety instructions mentioned in this manual, the following additional regulations apply:
Accident prevention regulations

Explosion proof regulations
Safety regulations for handling hazardous materials
Applicable standards and laws
2.6
Safety instructions for the operator / user
Protection against contact with hot and cold components must be provided by customer.
Coupling guard and hand guard on the pump / pump unit must not be removed during operation.
Pump must always be earth connected / grounded.
Protective equipment for personnel must be provided and used.
Toxic liquid leakage must be drained off safely, without endangering individuals and environment.
Legal requirements must be observed.
Danger through electric energy must be excluded.
NCL E4.12.10
7 of 62
2. Safety
2.7
Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and

assembly
Alteration works or modifications on the pump are only allowed after consulting Dickow Pumpen.
Only original parts or parts approved by Dickow shall be used.
Repairs on the pump / pump unit may only be done during shutdown.
The pump casing must have cooled down to ambient temperature.
The pump must be depressurized and drained.
Consider the procedure for decommissioning according to chapter 6.6.
Pumps handling products dangerous to health must be decontaminated according to chapter 4.4
Coupling guard and hand guard must be mounted again after completion of the works.
Works on the pump unit may be done only with disconnected electricity.
Secure the pump unit against unintentional switch-on.
2.8
Non-observance of the instruction manual
Non-observance of this manual leads to loss of warranty and damage claims. Non-observance will
involve the following risks:
Endangering of individuals through electrical, thermal, mechanical and chemical impacts.

Danger through explosions.
Danger through breakdown of essential functions.
Endangering of environment through leakage of toxic liquids.
2.9
Notices on explosion protection
DANGER
Operation in explosive areas requires stringent attention to this

chapter.
NCL E4.12.10
Only pumps with Ex-identification are allowed to be used in

explosive areas.
Pumps must be designated for this service in the pump data sheet.
Intended use must be guaranteed.
Inadmissible operating conditions must be avoided in any case.
Special conditions apply for operation in compliance with ECDirective 94/9/EC (ATEX). The Ex-symbol shown here marks the
chapters in this manual which require special attention.
8 of 62
2. Safety
2.9.1
Surface temperature
The highest surface temperatures are to be expected at the pump casing, the atmospheric seal ring of the
mechanical seal and in the area of antifriction bearings. The surface temperature of the pump casing
complies with the temperature of the pumped liquid.
The surface in the bearing bracket must be open to the atmosphere. Insulation of the bearing bracket is not
allowed.
The expected temperature of atmospheric seal ring, respectively the allowable liquid temperature or
operating temperature of supply fluid for the DICKOW Metal bellows mechanical seals N6, N9, N10,
N11 and N13 can be determined with the formula below.
Temperature
class
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Tmax Surface [C]

450 *
300
200
135
100
85
* max. operating temperature DICKOW-Metal bellows mechanical seal = 350C
-1
Speed [min ]
1450-1750
2900-3500
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
=
=
=
Class 1
20
35
TMECH.SEAL [K]
Class 2
25
45
Class 3
40
60
water and watery liquids

other liquids
oil
Seal faces material code

SiC / SiC
U.U.
SiC / Carbon U.A.
Factor K
0,75
1,0
Temperature on the atmospheric seal component

TMECH.SEAL =
T + (K TMECH.SEAL)
T = Temperature pumped liquid respectively supply fluid
Allowable temperature of pumped liquid respectively supply fluid

Tallowable =
Tmax - (K TMECH.SEAL) - TS
TS = Safety reduction ; T-Classes T6-T3 = 5 C
T-Classes T2/T1 = 10 C
NCL E4.12.10
9 of 62
2. Safety
NOTE
When using mechanical seals of other makes, the operating manuals of the
respective manufacturers must be considered.
2.9.2 Monitoring devices

The pump may only be operated within the limit values given in the pump data sheet and on the name tag.
In case the owner cannot guarantee for maintaining the operating limits, monitoring devices are required.
More information on monitoring devices can be inquired at DICKOW Pumpen.
NCL E4.12.10
10 of 62
3. Description
3. Description
3.1
General discription
This pump is used especially for dangerous liquids handled in the chemical, petrochemical and general
industry.
3.2
Design code
Example: NCL b h 32/210 A Ge
NCL
pump type
special design ; e.g. b = heating jacket
material execution ; e.g. h = 1.4408 / 1.4571
32
nominal width discharge flange [mm]
210
nominal impeller diameter [mm]
scope of supply ; e.g. A = bare shaft pump
Ge
shaft sealing ; e.g. Ge = standard mechanical seal, balanced
3.3 Classification pump size / frame size

Frame size
Pump sizes
NCL E4.12.10
II
III
IV
26/170
26/210
32/165
32/210
40/165
40/210
50/165
50/210
32/250
40/250
40/320
50/250
50/330
65/165
65/210
65/250
80/165
80/210
80/250
100/210
65/320
80/320
100/250
100/320
100/400
125/250
125/320
125/400
150/250
150/320
150/400
150/500
200/260
200/320
200/400
200/500
250/320
250/400
250/500
11 of 62
3. Description
3.4
Identification
3.4.1
Name tag
Fig. 1: Name tag German and English
3.4.2
Identification acc. to EC-Explosion Proof Directive

Group II
Category 2
Application in atmospheres with gas / steam / fog
Protection through constructural safety EN 13464-5
see below
Reference number of technical documentation
Fig. 2: ATEX-Name tag

The surface temperature does not depend on the ignition source, but on the temperature of the pumped
liquid. There is no identification with a temperature class or a temperature. The symbol "X" is integrated
in the identification. Chapter 2.9.1 refers to the arising surface temperatures. (Consider the notes on the
pump data sheet)
NCL E4.12.10
12 of 62
3. Description
3.5
Design
Design
volute casing pump
horizontal installation
single stage
compliance with requirements of ISO 5199
casing dimensions according to EN 22858
Pump casing
single volute / double volute (depending on pump size)
radially split
cast-on feet or centerline mounted
Impeller
closed or open
back vanes, injection slots and/or relief holes for thrust load balance
Bearing
motor end: paired angular ball bearing as fixed bearing
pump end: cylinder roller bearing
oil lubrication
optional: grease lubrication
Shaft sealing
stuffing box
single and double mechanical seal
cartridge seal
3.6
Scope of supply
Depending on the pump execution, the following items belong to the scope of supply:
Pump
Elastic coupling with or without spacer
Coupling guard
Casted base plate respectively welded base plate of stiff design
Drive motor
Special accessories if required
NCL E4.12.10
13 of 62
3. Description
3.7
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions and weights can be taken from the foundation plan / dimensional drawing.
NCL E4.12.10
14 of 62
4. Handling / Storage / Disposal

4.1
Handling
DANGER
Slipping of pump / pump unit from its suspension

Danger of life through components falling down !
Lift the pump / pump unit only in horizontal position.

Never hook up the pump on its bare shaft.
Never hang up the pump unit on the ring screw of the motor.
Do not stay underneath floating loads.
Consider weight indications in the dimensional drawing.
Observe the local accident prevention regulations.
Use suitable and approved lifting accessories.
Fig. 3: lifting the pump
Fig. 4: lifting the complete pump unit
Fig. 5: lifting the pump mounted on base plate
NCL E4.12.10
15 of 62
4.2
Storage / Preservation
ATTENTION
Damage during storage through moisture or dirt.

Corrosion and / or contamination of the pump !
ATTENTION
Outside storage requires a watertight cover over pump or over packed

pump and accessories.
Wetted, contaminated or damaged openings and joints.

Leakage or damage of the pump !
Plugged openings should be uncovered only during installation.
The following measures are recommended for storage of the pump / pump unit:
Store the pump in a sheltered dry place with constant air humidity.
Turn the shaft manually once a month.
New pumps of material GGG (ductile iron) and ferritic cast steel are covered inside with anti-corrosive
agent and dewatering-fluid. The maximum dry storage period is 12 months.
For storing a pump that has been in operation already, consider chapter 6.6.
4.3
Return of pump
Drain the pump properly considering chapter 7.3.

Rinse and clean the pump in general, especially when handling dangerous, explosive, hot or other
risky liquids.
A Document of Compliance completely filled in must always be attached to the pump. Refer to
chapter 11.2.
NOTE
If required, a Document of Compliance can be downloaded under

www.dickow.de.
http://www.dickow.de/unbedenk-en.pdf
NCL E4.12.10
16 of 62
4.4
Disposal
WARNING
Liquids dangerous to health

Danger for individuals and environment !
1.
2.
3.
4.
Collect and dispose rinsing water and residual liquid.

Wear protective clothing and face mask.
Consider the legal regulations for disposal of liquids dangerous to
health.
Disassemble pump / pump unit.

Collect grease and oil.
Separate pump materials
Dispose according to the local regulations.
NCL E4.12.10
17 of 62
5. Installation / Mounting
5.1
Safety Instructions
DANGER
Improper installation in explosive area

Danger of explosion !
Consider the local applicable explosion proof regulations.

Consider indications on the pump data sheet and on the name tag of
pump and motor.
5.2 Foundation
WARNING
Installation on weak and unstable foundations

Personal injury and material damage !
Consider sufficient concrete strength (minimum class XO) of the

foundation acc. to DIN 1045.
Place the pump unit on hardened foundation only.
Place the pump unit on level and even surfaces only.
Consider weight indications of dimensional drawing.
5.3
Installation of pump unit
5.3.1
Installation on foundation
1.
Place the pump unit on the foundation and align it with a water-level.
Allowable deviation: 0,2 mm/m
Insert shims for height compensation. Always insert them both-sided near the
foundation bolts between base plate and foundation.
If the space between the foundation bolts is > 600 mm, insert additional shims in the
middle between the foundation bolts.
All shims must seat solidly.
Hook the foundation bolts into the provided bore.
Concrete the foundation bolts.
Align the base plate after concrete has hardened.
Tighten the foundation bolts evenly.
Pour the base plate with vibration-free concrete of normal graining with a watercement-value (W/Z-value) 0,5. Provide a pourable consistency by using a mobile
solvent. Cure of concrete according to DIN 1045.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NCL E4.12.10
18 of 62
5.3.2
Installation without foundation
Installation without foundation requires a solid and even ground.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Place the pump unit on stilts and align it with a water-level.

For height compensation, loosen screws and counter nuts of stilts.
Adjust the nut until available height differences are compensated.
Fasten the counter nuts of the stilts.
5.4
Piping
DANGER
Exceedance of the allowable loads at the pump flanges

Danger to life from leaking hot, toxic, caustic or flammable liquids.
NCL E4.12.10
Do not use the pump as an anchor point for piping.

Support piping before the pump and connect it stress-free.
Consider allowable flange forces and moments according to chapter 5.4.2.
Compensate expansion of the piping in case of high temperatures.
19 of 62
5.4.1
Suction pipe
Layout of suction pipe requires special attention. NPSH Available and NPSH Required must be clearly
defined. Pay attention to the following:
Mounting of elbows close to the pump suction must be avoided. Provide a straight pipe of
minimum two suction pipe diameters.
Never connect a larger suction pipe direct to the pump. Flow eddies reduce the free flow area of the
pump. Use an eccentric reducer, consider the figures below.
Fig. 6: Flow eddies
Fig. 7: Reducer connection
At suction lift conditions, the suction pipe must continuously slope upwards towards pump suction.
Eliminate air pockets.
At flooded suction conditions, the suction pipe must slope gradually downwards to the suction
flange. Avoid air pockets to ensure a complete venting.
Maximum flow speed of 2 m/s must not be exceeded.
ATTENTION
Welding beads, scale and other impurities in the piping.

Damage of the pump !
Piping must be thoroughly cleaned before connecting the pump.

Remove impurities from the pipes.
If required, insert a filter.
Use a filter with a mesh width of 0,5 mm.

Insert filter with a surface of minimum triple the pipe section.
NOTE
NCL E4.12.10
20 of 62
5.4.2
Allowable flange forces and moments
pump size
26/125 - 210
32/165 - 250
40/125 - 320
50/125 - 330
65/125 - 320
80/165 - 320
100/210 - 400
125/250 - 400
150/250 - 500
200/250 - 500
250/320 - 500
pump size
26/125 - 210
32/165 - 250
40/125 - 320
50/125 - 330
65/125 - 320
80/165 - 320
100/210 - 400
125/250 - 400
150/250 - 500
200/250 - 500
250/320 - 500
Suction flange
DN
40
1 "
50
2"
65
3"
80
3"
100
4"
125
6"
125
6"
150
6"
200
8"
250
10"
300
12"
Fx [N]
GGG GS
Fy [N]
GGG GS
Fz [N]
GGG GS
F [N]
GGG GS
Mx [Nm]
GGG GS
My [Nm]
GGG GS
Mz [Nm]
GGG GS
M [Nm]
GGG GS
556
875
490
770
445
700
860
1360
580
910
400
630
470
735
840
1330
735
1155
670
1050
600
945
1150
1820
625
1022
445
700
515
805
910
1430
935
1470
825
1295
760
1190
1460
2310
670
1050
490
770
535
840
970
1540
1115
1750
1000
1575
915
1435
1750
2760
715
1120
515
805
580
910
1040
1640
1490
2345
1335
2100
1200
1890
2330
3670
780
1225
560
875
645
1015 1150
1820
1760
2765
1580
2485
1425
2240
2750
4340
935
1470
670
1050
845
1330 1350
2130
1760
2765
1580
2485
1425
2240
2750
4340
935
1470
670
1050
845
1330 1350
2130
2225
3500
2000
3150
1800
2835
3480
5490
1115
1750
780
1225
915
1435 1620
2550
2980
4690
2670
4200
2400
3780
4640
7310
1445
2275
1025 1610 1180 1855 2130
3360
4245
5845
3785
5215
3430
4725
6620
9130
2260
3115
1600 2205 1855 2555 3320
4580
5080
7000
4550
6265
4090
5635
7950 10950 3075
4235
2185 3010 2515 3465 4520
6230
Discharge flange
DN
25
1"
32
1 "
40
1 "
50
2"
65
3"
80
3"
100
4"
125
6"
150
6"
200
8"
250
10"
NCL E4.12.10
Fx [N]
GGG GS
Fy [N]
GGG GS
Fz [N]
GGG
GS
F [N]
GGG
GS
Mx [Nm]
GGG
GS
My [Nm]
GGG GS
Mz [Nm]
GGG GS
M [Nm]
GGG
GS
335
525
315
490
380
595
570
910
400
630
270
420
315
490
570
910
400
630
380
595
470
735
730
1150
490
770
335
525
380
595
710
1120
490
770
445
700
560
875
860
1360
580
910
400
630
470
735
840
1330
670
1050
600
945
735
1155
1150
1820
625
980
445
700
515
805
910
1430
825
1295
755
1190
935
1470
1460
2310
670
1050
490
770
535
840
970
1540
1000 1575
915
1435
1111
1750
1750
2760
715
1120
515
805
580
910
1040
1640
1335 2100
1200
1890
1490
2345
2330
3670
780
1225
560
875
645
1015
1150
1820
1580 2485
1425
2240
1760
2765
2750
4340
935
1470
670
1050
845
1330
1350
2130
2000 3150
1800
2835
2225
3500
3480
5490
1115
1750
780
1225
915
1435
1620
2550
2670 4200
2400
3780
2980
4690
4640
7310
1445
2275
1025
1610
1180
1855
2130
3360
3790 5215
3430
4725
4245
5845
6620
9130
2260
3115
1600
2205
1855
2555
3320
4580
21 of 62
Forces and moments are based on 20C. Temperature dependent correction values are given in figure 9.
Fig. 8: Temperature correction diagram

In case that not all acting loads reach the maximum allowable values, one of these loads may exceed the
limit value under the following provisions.
Exceedance is limited to 1,4 times the allowable value.

For the actual forces and moments acting on the flange shall apply:
/F/ actual
/F/
max. allowable
5.5
/M/ actual
/M/
max. allowable
Insulation
WARNING
Wetted casing parts adopt the temperature of the pumped liquid.

Risk of burns !
ATTENTION
Insulate casing parts

Attach protective device
Heat accumulation in the bearing bracket

Bearing damage !
NCL E4.12.10
Do not insulate the bearing bracket
22 of 62
5.6
Coupling alignment
DANGER
Inadmissible temperatures on coupling or antifriction bearings due to

misalignment of the coupling
WARNING
Proper alignment of coupling must anytime be ensured.
Unintentional switch-on of the pump unit

Risk of injury through moving components !
ATTENTION
Works on the pump unit may be done only with disconnected electricity.
Offset of pump shaft and motor shaft

Damage of pump, motor and coupling !
Coupling check has always to be performed after pipe connection.

Coupling check has also to be performed at pump units supplied on common
base plate.
Fig. 9: Angular and radial misalignment of couplings
Fig. 10: Coupling alignment
NCL E4.12.10
23 of 62
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Dismantle coupling guard.

Loosen support foot.
Place a straight edge (1) axially across the coupling half.
Possible radial displacement Kr becomes visible as a light gap.
Better: Determine the radial misalignment by measuring the distances A and B at three points
staggered by 120.
The coupling is aligned correctly if the distance to the shaft is identical at all points.
Check the distance s1 circularly between the coupling halves. The coupling is aligned correctly if
the distance is circularly identical.
Concerning the allowable deviation s1 and Kr of both coupling halves, refer to the instruction
manual of the coupling manufacturer !
Mount the support foot.
Mount the coupling guard.
5.7
Alignment of pump and motor
WARNING
Exposed rotating coupling

Risk of injury through rotating shaft !
DANGER
Operate the pump unit only with coupling guard.

Select the coupling guard according to corresponding standards.
Ignition hazard through friction sparks

Use non-sparking material for coupling guard only to exclude flying sparks in
case of contact.
Consider EN 13463-1.
After the pump unit is installed and piping is connected, check the coupling alignment and realign motor
if necessary.
Use shims for height compensation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Dismantle coupling guard.

Check coupling alignment. Consider chapter 5.6.
Loosen hold down bolts of motor.
Place shims under the motor feet for height compensation.
Tighten hold down bolts of motor.
Check function of coupling / shaft. The coupling must easily be turnable by hand.
Mount the coupling guard.
Check the space between coupling and coupling guard.
NCL E4.12.10
24 of 62
5.8
Electrical connection of the pump unit
DANGER
Improper electrical installation

DANGER
Electrical installation requires additionally observance of IEC 60079-14.

Explosion proof motors shall be connected through motor protection switch
only
Working on the pump unit by unqualified personnel

Danger to life through electric shock !
WARNING
Electrical connection must be performed by qualified electrician only.

Regulations IEC 30364 and IEC 60079 must be considered.
Incorrect power connection

Short circuit !
Adhere to connection conditions of local energy supply companies.
Proceedings:
1.
2.
3.
Check for compliance of the available supply voltage with the indications on the motor name tag.
Select suitable connection method.
Check for identical rotating direction of motor and pump. Consider the rotating direction arrow of
the pump !
NOTE
Observe the instruction manual of the motor !
NCL E4.12.10
25 of 62
5.8.1
Checking rotating direction
DANGER
Temperature rise through parts touching each other

ATTENTION
Never check rotating direction with dry pump.

Disconnect the pump for checking rotating direction.
Wrong rotating direction of motor and pump

1.
2.
3.
Consider the rotating direction arrow on the pump.
Start motor briefly. Note rotating direction of the motor.

Rotating direction of the motor must comply with the rotating direction arrow on the pump.
In case of wrong rotating direction, change the cables in the motor terminal box.
NCL E4.12.10
26 of 62
6. Commissioning / Decommissioning
6.1
Commissioning
The following points must be checked prior to start-up;
The pump unit is correctly electronically connected to all relevant protective devices.
The pump is filled with liquid.
Rotating direction has been checked.
All additional connections are connected and fully functional.
Lubricants are checked.
After a longer standstill period, the measures mentioned in chapter 7
"Maintenance/Servicing/Inspection" must be considered and performed.
6.1.1
Filling of lubrication oil
ATTENTION
Lack of lube oil in the oil reservoir of constant level oiler

Damage of antifriction bearings !
ATTENTION
Check oil level regularly.

Oil reservoir must always be sufficiently filled.
Lack of lube oil in the bearing bracket

Damage of antifriction bearings !
NCL E4.12.10
The threaded hole of the constant level oiler must be in horizontal position.
27 of 62
1.
2.
3.
Unscrew vent plug (1).

Fold down the constant level oiler (2) away from bearing bracket (3) and hold it tight.
Fill in the oil through the vent plug bore (1) until the filling level reaches the connection pipe of
the constant level oiler (2)
Fill up the oil reservoir to the maximum.
Fold back the constant level oiler (2) to its original position.
Screw in the vent plug (1).
Check the oil level in the oil reservoir of the constant level oiler (2) after a few minutes. Repeat
steps 4 to 6 until oil outflow from the oil reservoir has stopped.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NOTE
Exceeding oil level causes temperature increase or oil leakage.
For filling quantity and oil quality refer to chapter 7.2.2.

Executions with grase lubrication are not provided with constant level oiler and vent plug. Antifriction
bearings are permanent grease lubricated. Relubrication is not required.
6.1.2
Filling and venting the pump
DANGER
Formation of explosive atmosphere inside the pump

1.
2.
3.
6.1.3
The pump must permanently be filled with liquid.

Appropriate monitoring measures must be provided.
Vent and fill up pump and suction pipe with liquid.

Pump is selfventing.
Open shut-off valve in suction pipe completely
Open all additional connections completely (e.g. external circulation, external flush)
Shaft sealing
The pump will be supplied with installed shaft sealing. If a fluid reservoir is foreseen, it must be filled
according to the reservoir manual.
If double mechanical seals are provided, a barrier pressure supply must be connected prior to starting the
pump, following the instruction manual of reservoir respectively mechanical seal.
In case of external flush, the pump must be flushed with the quantities and pressures as stated in the pump
data sheet respectively in the dimensional drawing.
NCL E4.12.10
28 of 62
6.1.4
Design with heating jacket
Pump casing and intermediate casing with heating jacket.

Permissible heating agent:
Hot water
Steam
Heat transfer oil
Pressure- and temperature limits:
tmax = 200C
pmax = 25 bar
ATTENTION
Elevated surface temperature

ATTENTION
Consider the allowable temperature class.
Lack of heating fluid

ATTENTION
Provide sufficient amount of heating fluid.
Heating period too short

ATTENTION
Consider a sufficient heating period of the pump (approx. 2 hours)

Check free rotation of the pump shaft.
Exceedance of the allowable heating fluid temperature

Leak of pumped liquid or heating agent !
NCL E4.12.10
Consider the application limits for pressure and temperature.
29 of 62
6.1.5
Inspection of shaft sealing
A mechanical seal is a dynamical seal and due to physical and technical reasons never leakage free.
Design, tolerances, operating conditions, smoothness etc. determine the quantity of leakage.
Leakage may increase during normal running-in of the sliding faces but will return to normal value after
sufficient running time. If this should not be the case, the mechanical seal must be shut down, dismantled
and inspected.
A gland packing must slightly drip during operation.
DANGER
Elevated temperature at gland packings

Gland packings are not suitable for use in explosive areas.
Leakage on the gland packing is adjusted as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tighten the gland nuts only slightly by hand.

Check rectangular and centric seat by using a packing gauge.
After the pump is filled up, leakage must be available.
Tighten the gland nuts so far that the appearing leakage is reduced to 60-120 drops per minute.
Start the pump.
After a running time of 5 minutes, reduce the leakage by fastening the gland nuts for 1/6 turn.
Watch the leakage.
Leakage too high
Repeat step 6 and 7.
Leakage too low
Loosen the gland nuts slightly.
No leakage
Switch off the pump unit immediately!

Loosen the gland and repeat the procedure.
6.1.6
Starting the pump
DANGER
Exceedance of allowable pressure- and temperature limits

Danger of explosion ! !
Leakage of hot or toxic liquid
NCL E4.12.10
Never operate pump with closed shut-off valves in suction and/or

discharge pipe.
Start-up pump unit only against partially opened shut-off valve on
discharge side.
30 of 62
DANGER
Elevated temperature through dry run

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Never operate pump in empty condition.

Always fill up pump properly.
Operate pump only within the allowable operating range.
Open shut-off valve completely in suction pipe

Open shut-off valve partially in discharge pipe
Switch on the motor.
When the pressure gauge indicates pressure, open shut-off valve on discharge side until
the duty point is reached.
When the operating temperature is reached, check coupling alignment and realign if
necessary.
6.2
Operating the pump
WARNING
High surface temperatures through hot liquids

Risk of burns !
ATTENTION
Avoid touching the pump surface.

Wear protective clothing.
Abnormal noises, vibrations, temperatures or leakage

6.3
Switch off the pump immediately.

Only restart the pump unit after cause of trouble has been eliminated.
Impeller trimming
The impellers are hydraulically balanced in order to reduce thrust load. Additional to the wear rings,
thrust load balance is done individually or in combination with
Back vanes
Balancing holes
Injection slots
Impeller diameter can be trimmed within the range that is shown in the performance sheet.
NCL E4.12.10
31 of 62
6.4
Operating limits
DANGER
Exceedance of operating limits regarding pressure, temperature and speed

Leaking hot or toxic liquid !
6.4.1
Maintain the allowable service conditions specified in the pump data sheet.
Avoid operation against closed shut-off valve.
Never operate pump at a temperature higher than specified in the pump data
sheet.
Flow rate
If not stated otherwise in the pump data sheet, the following applies:
Qmin
= 0,25 x Qopt
Qmax
= 1,2 x Qopt
6.4.2
Switching frequencies
DANGER
Elevated surface temperature of the motor

When using explosion proof motors, consider the information in the motor
manual regarding switching frequencies.
The switching frequencies are defined by the maximum temperature rise of the motor and depend on the
power reserve of the motor during operation and on the starting conditions.
NOTE
Read instruction manual of motor manufacturer !
6.4.3
Abrasive liquids or solids
If products containing abrasives or solids are handled, increased wear is to be expected.

The inspection intervals in this regard must be shorter than the usual ones.
NCL E4.12.10
32 of 62
6.5 Switching off the pump

1. Keep shut-off valve in suction pipe open.
2. Close shut-off valve in discharge pipe.
3. Switch off the motor and watch for steady run down.
NOTE
In case a non-return valve is installed in the discharge pipe, the shut-off valve can
remain open. A counter pressure must be available.
For a longer standstill period, the following must be observed:
Liquids which tend to polymerization, crystallization or solidification, must be drained completely.

If required, rinse the pump with a suitable liquid.
Close shut-off valve in the suction pipe.
Flush connections must be closed.
6.6 Decommissioning
The pump unit remains in the piping:
Provide sufficient amount of liquid for the test runs.

Switch on the pump unit regularly monthly or quarterly.
The pump unit will be dismantled and stored:
Empty the pump properly.

Observe the safety instructions acc. to chapter 7.1 / 7.3.
Spray the inside of the pump casing with preservation agent. Not required for stainless steel pumps.
Spray preservation agent through suction and discharge flange.
Plug suction and discharge flanges, e.g. with plastic caps.
Lubricate all unpainted outside surfaces of the pump with oil and grease free of silicone. Not required
for stainless steel pumps.
Pay attention to additional notes in chapter 4.2.
NCL E4.12.10
33 of 62
7. Maintenance / Servicing / Inspection

7.1
Safety regulations
DANGER
Improper maintained pump unit

WARNING
Maintain the pump unit regularly

Establish a maintenance schedule
Unintentional switching-on of the pump unit

Risk of injury through moving components !
WARNING
Works on the pump unit may be done only at disconnected electricity.

Hot liquids
Risk of injury!
WARNING
Let the pump unit cool down to ambient temperature.

Risk of injury !
Consider legal requirements.

Take safety measures for individuals and environment when draining the
pumped liquid.
Decontaminate the pumps.
The user must assure that maintenance, inspection and assembly is performed by qualified personnel.
These persons must have studied this operating manual comprehensively.
A maintenance schedule needs a minimum of effort and may avoid expensive repairs.
Any use of force on the pump unit must be avoided.
NCL E4.12.10
34 of 62
7.2
Operating surveillance
DANGER
Elevated surface temperature through hot running antifriction bearings

Danger of explosion ! Fire hazard !
ATTENTION
Check antifriction bearings regularly for running noise.

Check the lubricant level regularly.
Wear caused by dry run

ATTENTION
Never operate an empty pump unit.

Never close the shut-off valve in suction pipe during operation.
Exceedance of the allowable liquid temperature

Operation against closed discharge valve is not allowed.

Consider the temperature indications in the pump data sheet.
The following requires regular checking during operation:
The pump must always run steady and vibration-free.

Check antifriction bearings for running noise. Vibrations, noises and increased power input are signs
of wear.
Check the elastic elements of the coupling.
Clean the filter in the suction pipe regularly.
7.2.1
Lubrication / Lifetime of antifriction bearings
DANGER
Elevated surface temperature through hot running antifriction bearings or

defective bearing seals
Danger of explosion ! Fire hazard !
Check lubricant condition regularly.

Check lubricant level regularly.
Lubrication of antifriction bearings is normally provided by mineral oil.

Lube oil CLP46 or 68 according to DIN 51517 or HD20W/20 with a kinematic viscosity of 46-68 mm2/s
at 40C can be used, e.g.
OMV lube EPX 46

Shell Morlina 46-68
NCL E4.12.10
35 of 62

The calculated lifetime of antifriction bearings is also at critical service conditions more than 25000
operating hours.
The oil filling shall be renewed the first time after 200 operating hours, then once a year.
Bearing frame
0/I
II
III
IV
V
Filling Qty [l]

0,75
1,0
1,25
2,7
3,5
NOTE
Executions with grease lubrication have permanent grease lubricated antifriction
bearings. Relubrication is not required.
NOTE
If the ambient temperature is < -20C DICKOW Pumpen should be consulted.
Observe the comments in the pump data sheet.
7.2.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Oil change
Place a suitable bowl for the waste oil underneath the drain plug.
Unscrew the drain plug from the bearing bracket and drain the oil.
After emptying, screw in the drain plug again.
Fill up oil again considering chapter 6.1.1.
WARNING
Lubricating liquids dangerous to health

Danger for individuals and environment !
NCL E4.12.10
Draining requires safety measures for individuals and environment .

Consider legal requirements concerning disposal of liquids dangerous to
health.
36 of 62
7.3
Drainage and Disposal
WARNING
Pumped liquids dangerous to life

Endangering for individuals and environment !
Collect flushing liquid and possible residual liquid and dispose it.
Wear protective clothing and face masks.
Consider legal requirements concerning disposal of liquids.
Drainage of pumped liquids through the drain plugs at the casing, through a connected shut-off valve or
through a flange.
Mode of drainage and position can be taken from the dimensional drawing !
7.4
Disassembly of pump unit
7.4.1
General instructions
Pay attention to safety instructions of chapter 7.1.

Working on the motor requires observance of the documentation provided by the motor manufacturer.
Consider the sectional drawings when disassembling.
In case of damage, our service department can be contacted.
DANGER
Working on the pump unit without sufficient preparation

Risk of injury !
7.4.2
5.
6.
7.
8.
Switch off the pump unit properly.

Close shut-off valves on suction and discharge side.
Drain and depressurize the pump.
Flush connections must be closed.
Let the pump unit cool down to ambient temperature.
Removal of driver
Disconnect the motor.

Remove coupling guard.
Remove the hold down bolts of the motor from the baseplate.
Decouple pump and motor by displacing the motor.
WARNING
Tilting the motor

Squeezing of hands and feet !
NCL E4.12.10
Secure the motor by lifting or bracing.
37 of 62

NOTE
If pump units are equipped with spacer type couplings, the motor can remain
bolted to the baseplate while dismantling the interchangeable unit.
7.4.3
Disassembly of rotating unit
If spacer type couplings are used, the motor can remain bolted to the baseplate. Remove the spacer piece
according to the operating instructions of the coupling manufacturer.
Fig. 11: Disassembly of rotating unit

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Loosen hexagon nut 920.2.

Loosen hexagon head bolt (1) of support foot 183.
Press the complete interchangeable unit (2) out off the volute casing 102 by using jack screws.
Pull the unit out off the casing and place it beside.
Pull off the coupling hub (3) from the shaft end.
WARNING
Tilting the rotating unit

7.4.4
Secure the rotating unit by lifting or bracing.
Disassembly of impeller
The works according to chapter 7.4.3 are completed.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Clamp the complete unit in vertical position in a jaw chuck.

Loosen impeller nut 922 respectively inner hexagon cap screw 914.12 (frame size 0) (right hand
thread).
Pull off the impeller from pump shaft.
Remove the key 940.1.
NCL E4.12.10
38 of 62

7.4.5
Disassembly of shaft sealing

DICKOW-Mechanical seal N6 / N10 / N11
1. Pull off the mechanical seal 433 from pump shaft.
2. Remove the hexagon nut 920.1.
3. Press the intermediate casing 113 out off its centring and place it on the bench.
4. Remove hexagon nut 920.5, pull off the packing ring 457.
5. Slide the seal ring 475 carefully out off the intermediate casing.
DICKOW-Mechanical seal N9 / N13
1. Pull off the product side mechanical seal 433.1 from the pump shaft.
3. Slide the seal end plate 471, the pressure ring 474 and the stationary seal ring 475.2 towards the
shaft step.
5. Press the intermediate casing 113 out off its centring.
6. Pull off the atmospheric seal 433.2 and the distance sleeve 525 from the pump shaft.
7. Take out the seal end plate 471, the pressure ring 474 and the stationary seal ring 475.2 from the
bearing bracket.
8. Remove the rotating seal ring 475.1 from the intermediate casing 113.
Standard Mechanical seal according to EN 12756
1. If available, remove the inner hexagon cap screw 914.1 and press the packing ring 457 out off the
intermediate casing 113.
2. Pull off the shaft sleeve 524 together with the rotating seal unit from the pump shaft.
4. Press the intermediate casing 113 out off its centring.
6. Remove the seal end plate 471.
7. Dismantle seal ring 475 and O-ring.
NCL E4.12.10
39 of 62

Tandem-Standard Mechanical seal acc. to EN 12756 (API-Plan 52)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove the hexagon nut 920.5.

Slide the seal end plate 471 with the stationary seal ring 475.2 towards the shaft step.
Press the intermediate casing 113 out off its centring.
Pull off the shaft sleeve 524 with mechanical seal 433 and seal ring support 476 from pump shaft.
Loosen the grub screws in the mechanical seal 433.2 and pull off the seal from the shaft sleeve.
Remove seal ring support 476 with rotating seal ring 475.1.
Loosen grub screw in the mechanical seal 433.1 and pull the seal off.
Press the rotating seal ring 475.1 together with the O-ring out off the seal ring support 476.
Take the seal end plate 471 out off the bearing bracket.
Press the stationary seal ring 475.2 together with the O-ring out off the seal end plate.
Double Standard Mechanical seal acc. to EN 12756 (API-Plan 53)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove inner hexagon cap screw 914.1.

Remove seal ring support 476 and seal ring 475.
Press the stationary seal ring 475.2 together with the O-ring out off the seal ring support 476.
Pull off the shaft sleeve 524 with the mechanical seal 433.1/2 from pump shaft.
Press the intermediate casing 113 out off its centring and place it on the bench.
Remove the hexagon nut 920.5 and pull off the seal end plate 471.
Press the stationary seal ring 475.2 together with the O-ring out off the seal end plate 471.
Cartridge-Mechanical seal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If available, remove the inner hexagon cap screw 914.1 and press the packing ring 457 out off the
intermediate casing 113.
Press the intermediate casing 113 out off its centring.
Pull off the intermediate ring 509 from the pump shaft.
Attach assembly gauges to the mechanical seal.
Loosen the grub screws and pull off the complete seal unit 433 from the pump shaft.
NCL E4.12.10
40 of 62

7.4.6
Disassembly of antifriction bearings

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Loosen grub screw 904.1 and pull off the deflector 507 from pump shaft.
Loosen hexagon head bolt 901.2 and pull off bearing cover 360 with radial seal ring 421.2.
Press the pump shaft 211 together with angular ball bearing 325 out off the bearing bracket seat.
Use a press- or drilling spindle.
Remove the inner hexagon cap screws 914.2 and take off the bearing bracket lantern 344.
Press the outer ring of the cylinder roller bearing 322 out off the bearing bracket 330.
Remove circlip 932.2 und disk 550.3 from pump shaft.
Pull off the angular ball bearing 325 from pump shaft.
Pull off the disk 550.3 from pump shaft.
The following procedure applies for frame size V:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Loosen grub screw 904.1 and pull off the deflector 507 from pump shaft.
Loosen inner hexagon cap screw 914.6 and pull off bearing cover 360.2 together with radial seal
ring 421.1.
Loosen inner hexagon cap screw 914.5 and pull off bearing cover 360.1 together with radial seal
ring 421.2.
Press the pump shaft 211 together with angular ball bearing 325 out off the bearing bracket seat.
Press the outer ring of the cylinder roller bearing 322 out off the bearing bracket 330.
Loosen and remove shaft nut 921.
Pull off the angular ball bearing 325 from pump shaft.
7.4.7
Replacement of antifriction bearings
Frame size
0/I
II
III
IV
V
322
NU 306
NU 307
NU 409
NU 411
NU 313
325
2x 7306 BUA
2x 7307 BUA
2x 7311 BUA
2x 7313 BUA
2x 7314 BUA
Execution with permanent grease lubrication:

Frame size
0/I
II
III
IV
NCL E4.12.10
321
2x 6306.2RS
2x 6307.2RS
2x 6409.2RS
2x 6411.2RS
41 of 62
7.5
Inspection
7.5.1
Impeller / Wear ring
The surfaces in the wear ring area may not have any visible grooves. Diameters of surfaces have to be
measured. The total clearance in new condition is 0,6 mm. If the clearance exceeds 0,9 mm, the wear
rings must be replaced.
7.5.2
Bearing bracket
Measure the inner diameter of ball bearing seats. Replace the bearing bracket if following values are
exceeded:
Frame size 0 / I
Frame size II
Frame size III
Frame size IV
Frame size V
7.5.3
max. 72,009 mm
max. 80,009 mm
max. 120,010 mm
max. 140,012 mm
max. 140,026 mm + 150,026 mm
DICKOW - Mechanical seal
The metal bellows are stressed when installed, the spring load provides a sufficient closing force on the
sliding surfaces.
Measure the mechanical seal after disassembly and thorough cleaning.
Replace the mechanical seal if the length dimensions are below the following:
Fig. 12: Seal length

Mechanical seal
N6
N10
N11
N9
N13
NCL E4.12.10
product side
atmosphere side
product side
atmosphere side
Code
A
U1
U3
U3
A
U1
U3
U3
U2
U3
U2
0/I
46
49
54
48,5
86
86
81
48,5
45
53,5
48
L [mm] at frame size

II
III
58
58
58
58
65
65
60,5
56
105
105
113
60,5
56
53
59
65,5
65,5
58
64
IV
67
67
77
74
140
74
79
79
82
42 of 62
7.6
Assembly of pump unit
7.6.1
General instructions
Consider the safety instructions of chapter 7.1.

Consider sectional drawings for assembly.
Use new gaskets only.
Mount gaskets without lubricants.
Do not use assembling aid when mounting the gaskets. If necessary, use customary contact adhesive.
Never use superglue.
Lubricate fittings and screw joints with graphite or similar lubricant. Lubricants must be compatible
with the pumped liquid.
Tighten all screws properly. Consider chapter 7.7.
When mounting the shaft sleeve use new tolerance rings only.
ATTENTION
Unprofessional assembly
Assemble pumps / pump units under consideration of the general rules of

engineering.
Only use original spare parts.
The following must be checked prior to assembly:
All dismantled parts are cleaned and checked for wear.

Damaged or worn out parts must be replaced by original spare parts.
All sealing surfaces are cleaned.
NCL E4.12.10
43 of 62

7.6.2
1.
2.
3.
Assembly of antifriction bearings
Slide the disk 550.3 onto the pump shaft.

Heat up the angular ball bearing 325 to 80-100C.
Push the angular ball bearing 325 onto the pump shaft until limit.
NOTE
Install the angular ball bearings in O-arrangement.
Angular ball bearings installed in pairs must be of the same manufacturer.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Slide disk 550.3 and circlip 932.2 onto the pump shaft.
Press the outer ring of the cylinder roller bearing 322 into the bearing bracket 330.
Fit the bearing bracket lantern 344 and fasten it with inner hexagon cap screws 914.2.
Press the pump shaft 211 together with the angular ball bearing 325 into the bearing bracket seat.
Fit the bearing cover 360 with the new radial seal ring 421.2 and tighten the hexagon cap screws
901.2.
Push the deflector 507 onto the pump shaft. Tighten the grub screw 904.1.
The following procedure applies for frame size V:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Heat up the angular ball bearing 325 to 80-100C.

Push the angular ball bearing 325 onto the pump shaft until limit. Consider the NOTE
Screw on the shaft nut 921 and tighten it.
Press the outer ring of the cylinder roller bearing 322 into the bearing bracket 330.
Fit the bearing cover 360.2 with the new radial seal ring 421.1 and tighten the inner hexagon cap
screws 914.6.
Press the pump shaft 211 together with the angular ball bearing 325 into the bearing bracket seat.
Fit the bearing cover 360.1 with the new radial seal ring 421.2 and tighten the inner hexagon cap
screws 914.5.
Push the deflector 507 onto the pump shaft. Tighten the grub screw 904.1.
NCL E4.12.10
44 of 62

7.6.3
Assembly of mechanical seal

Installation requires attention of the following:
Consider the seal drawing.

Works must be performed proper and thoroughly.
Remove protective agent on sliding surfaces completely.
Never apply lubricants to sliding surfaces.
Never compress the metal bellows to a block.
Axial forces must always be applied to the bellows support when pushing on the metal bellows.
Check parallelism with the casing part after assembly.
Surface of shaft sleeve must be clean and smooth. The edge has a chamfer.
DICKOW-Mechanical seal N6 / N10 / N11

1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the seal ring 475 carefully into the intermediate casing.
Insert the pressure ring 474 and fasten it with hexagon nuts 920.5
Press the intermediate casing 113 into the centring and fasten it with hexagon nuts 920.1.
Slide the mechanical seal 433 onto the pump shaft.
DICKOW-Mechanical seal N9 / N13

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insert the rotating seal ring 475.1 into the intermediate casing 113.
Push the seal end plate 471, pressure ring 474 and stationary seal ring 475.2 onto the pump shaft
until it rests on the shaft step.
Push distance sleeve 525 and atmospheric seal 433.2 onto the pump shaft.
Fasten the seal casing by hexagon nuts 920.5.
Slide the product sided mechanical seal 433.1 onto the pump shaft.
Standard Mechanical seal acc. to EN 12756

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install the seal ring 475 with O-ring in the seal end plate 471.
Screw the seal end plate 471 to the intermediate casing 113 by hexagon nuts 920.5.
Push the shaft sleeve 524 and rotating seal unit onto the pump shaft.
If available, press the packing ring 457 into the intermediate casing 113 and fasten it with inner
hexagon cap screws 914.1.
NCL E4.12.10
45 of 62

Tandem-Standard Mechanical seal acc. to EN 12756 (API-Plan 52)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install the stationary seal ring 475.2 and O-ring in the seal end plate 471.
Push the seal end plate 471 onto the pump shaft until it rests on the shaft step.
Install the rotating seal ring 475.1 and O-ring in the seal ring support 476.
Push the mechanical seal 433.1 onto the shaft sleeve and fasten it with grub screw.
Push the seal ring support 476 onto the shaft sleeve.
Push the mechanical seal 433.2 onto the shaft sleeve and tighten the grub screw.
Slide the complete unit onto the pump shaft 211.
Screw the seal end plate 471 to the intermediate casing by hexagon nuts 920.5.
Double Standard Mechanical seal acc. to EN 12756 (API-Plan 53)

1.
Install the rotating seal ring 475.1 and O-ring in the seal end plate 471 and push it onto the pump
shaft.
Screw the seal end plate 471 to the intermediate casing by hexagon nuts 920.5.
Slide the shaft sleeve 524 with mechanical seal 433.1/2 onto the pump shaft.
Install stationary seal ring 475.2 and O-ring in seal ring support 476.
Screw the seal ring support 476 to the intermediate casing 113 by inner hexagon cap screws 914.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Push the complete seal unit 433 onto the pump shaft.
Press the intermediate casing 113 into the centring and fasten it be hexagon nuts 920.1.
Screw the seal unit 433 to the intermediate casing 113 by hexagon nuts 920.5.
Tighten the grub screws and loosen the assembly gauges.
7.6.4
1.
2.
Assembly of impeller
Slide the impeller onto the pump shaft.

Tighten the impeller nut 922 respectively the inner hexagon cap screw 914.12
(frame 0) by a torque wrench (right hand thread).
ATTENTION
Missing Heli-Coil insert

Impeller will not be fixed !
NCL E4.12.10
Make sure that impeller nut respectively pump shaft (frame 0) are provided
with Heli-Coil insert.
46 of 62

7.6.5
Assembly of rotating unit
WARNING
Tilting the rotating unit

Secure the rotating unit by lifting or bracing
NOTE
Consider Figure 15 !
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Slide the rotating unit into the volute casing.

Use new gasket 400.5.
Tighten hexagon nut 920.2 by a torque wrench.
Mount the support foot 183 with hexagon cap screw 901.1 and washer 554.8.
Fasten the support foot with hexagon cap screw to the baseplate.
Slide the coupling hub onto the shaft end.
7.6.9
Motor assembly
NOTE
The first two steps do not apply for pumps with spacer type coupling.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Couple pump and motor by displacing the motor.

Fix the motor to the baseplate.
Align pump and motor. Consider chapter 5.7.
Align coupling. Consider chapter 5.6.
NCL E4.12.10
47 of 62
7.7
Bolt torques
standard bolts
5
9
22
45
80
195
370
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
Bolt torque [Nm]

8.8
A4-70
expansion bolts
standard bolts
expansion bolts
4
6
16
30
55
55
40
145
135
100
280
260
195
Calculation basis:
80% Yield strength utilisation of screw material.
Friction coefficient = 0,14 ; use screw lubricant for threads and head / nut contact surface.
Recommended: Klber-paste HEL 46-450.
Torque controlled tightening by torque wrench.
NOTE
Deviating bolt torques are indicated in the pump data sheet.
Bolt torque for screwed plugs (independent of material):
G 1/4 = 25 Nm
G 3/8 = 45 Nm
G 1/2 = 75 Nm
Bolt torque for impeller nut 922 respectively inner hexagon cap screw 914.12 and shaft nut 921
(independent of material)
Frame size
0
I
II
III
IV
V
NCL E4.12.10
922 resp. 914.12

Bolt torque [Nm]
Wrench size
30
19
100
32
120
41
140
50
140
65
140
65
921
Bolt torque [Nm]
----------160
48 of 62
8. Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting
Failure
Pump delivers no or not enough liquid
Motor is overloaded
Bearing temperature too high
Pump is leaking
Increased noises and vibrations
Inadmissible temperature increase
Shaft seal leakage
Failure number
1 2 3 4 5
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Problem
Pump or piping not
completely vented or filled
Shut-off valve in suction line
not completely opened
X
X
Air pockets in piping system
Wrong rotating direction
Counter pressure of the pump

is higher than specified
Viscosity of pumped liquid is
higher than specified
Counter pressure of the pump

is lower than specified
Wrong speed
Pump unit is not aligned
correctly
Pump stressed by piping
Ball bearing damage

Unbalance of rotating parts,
e.g. impeller
Casing screws and screwed
plugs loose
Coupling gap not correct
X
X
X
NCL E4.12.10
NPSHA too low
Elimination
Venting respectively filling
Open shut-off valve
Correct piping layout
Install vent valve
Exchange 2 phases of power supply
Readjust the duty point by discharge
valve
Increase speed
Install a larger impeller
Consult the factory
Trim the impeller
Readjust the duty point by discharge
valve
Check liquid level in suction tank
Improve NPSHR by inducer
Reduce resistances in suction line
Open shut-off valve in suction line
completely
Check speed
Check coupling alignment and
correct if necessary
Check piping connections and pump
mounting
Renew antifriction bearings
Balance the parts
Tighten the screws and plugs
Renew gaskets
Correct coupling gap
49 of 62
8. Trouble shooting
Failure number
1 2 3 4 5
X
X
No cooling flow available

from motor to antifriction
bearing
Gland tightened too strong or
bevelled
Shaft sealing worn out
X
X
Shaft sleeve grooved or rough

Failure in circulation pipe
Damaged elastomeres on
mechanical seal
Boiling point of pumped
liquid at atmospheric pressure
is below the operating
temperature
X
X
NCL E4.12.10
Problem
Abrasive solids
Elimination
Check the plant
Install a cooling fan
Correct it
Renew shaft sealing
Check flushing/barrier fluid
Renew shaft sleeve
Enlarge the cross section
Replace elastomeres
Use double mechanical seal
Use seal with steam quench
Install wear resistant seal faces
Change seal flush (plan 31/32)
Install double mechanical seal
(plan 53)
50 of 62
9. Interchangeability
9.1
Frame size 0
NCL E4.12.10
51 of 62
9.2
Frame size I
NCL E4.12.10
52 of 62
9.3
Frame size II
NCL E4.12.10
53 of 62
9.4
Frame size III
NCL E4.12.10
54 of 62
9.5
Frame size IV
NCL E4.12.10
55 of 62
9.6
Frame size V
NCL E4.12.10
56 of 62
10. Sectional drawings

10.1 Pump
Fig. 13 : Sectional drawing Standard design NCL
914.12
Fig. 14 : Impeller bolting, frame size 0
NCL E4.12.10
57 of 62
Fig. 15: Bearing bracket, frame size V
Fig. 16: Execution with permanent lubricated antifriction bearings
NCL E4.12.10
58 of 62
10.2 Mechanical seal
Fig. 17:
single acting DICKOW-Mechanical seal
Fig. 18:
Tandem DICKOW-Mechanical seal
Fig. 19:
single acting DIN Standard-Mechanical seal
Fig. 20:
Tandem DIN Standard Mechanical seal
NCL E4.12.10
59 of 62
Fig. 21:
double acting DIN Standard-Mechanical seal
NCL E4.12.10
Fig. 22:
60 of 62
11. Certificates
11. Certificates
11.1 EC-Declaration of Conformity
EC-Declaration of Conformity
according to EC-Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG, Annex II, No. 1A
DICKOW PUMPEN KG
Siemensstrae 22
D-84478 Waldkraiburg
Herewith we declare that the pump unit described in the data sheet
Designation
Type:
Size
:
Design:
Serial No.:
Centrifugal pump
NCL
is in compliance with all relevant provisions of the EC-Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG.
Applied harmonized standards:

EN 809:1998
EN ISO 12100-1:2003
EN ISO 12100-2:2003
EN 12162:2001
EN ISO 12732-1:2008
EN ISO 12732-3:2008
EN ISO 14121-1:2007
EN ISO 20361:2009
Additionally applied standards and technical specifications:

EN ISO 5199:2002
EN ISO 9906:1999
EN 12723:2000
EN 22858:1993
VDMA 24276:2001
Waldkraiburg,
(Name, Position)
the responsible person is authorized to compile the technical documentation
NCL E4.12.10
61 of 62
11. Certificates
11.2 Document of Compliance

Document of Compliance
Please fill in this statement for health innocuousness completely and attach it to the pump to
be returned to the factory.
Pump data
Type:
Serial No.: PB
Reason for shipment
Contamination of the pump

Hazardous liquids were not handled
Hazardous liquids were handled
Pumped liquid:
The pump has been
cleaned
flushed
breamed
The following safety measures must be taken before opening/repairing the pump:
Customer data
Company:
Address:
Name:
(Block Letters)
Phone:
Fax:
E-Mail:
Position:
This is to certify that the above mentioned pump has been proper cleaned/flushed/breamed
and repair can be performed without risk.
Date:
NCL E4.12.10
Signature:
62 of 62
Instrucciones de servicio / montaje

NCL
N 44.NCL.ES4.04/14
Traduccin del manual de instrucciones original
DICKOW PUMPEN KG
ndice de contenido
ndice de contenido
ndice de contenido ...................................................................................................................................... 2
1. Generalidades ...................................................................................................................................... 4
2. Seguridad ............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Identificacin de advertencias ...................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Uso conforme a lo previsto .......................................................................................................... 6
2.3 Prevencin de usos errneos previsibles ...................................................................................... 6
2.4 Cualificacin del personal ............................................................................................................ 7
2.5 Normas de seguridad adicionales ................................................................................................. 7
2.6 Indicaciones para la seguridad del usuario/operador .................................................................... 7
2.7 Indicaciones para la seguridad en trabajos de mantenimiento, inspeccin y montaje .................. 7
2.8 Incumplimiento del manual de instrucciones ............................................................................... 8
2.9 Indicaciones sobre la proteccin contra explosiones .................................................................... 8
3. Descripcin .........................................................................................................................................11
3.1 Descripcin general .....................................................................................................................11
3.2 Designacin .................................................................................................................................11
3.3 Asignacin tamao constructivo/soporte de rodamiento.............................................................11
3.4 Identificacin ...............................................................................................................................12
3.5 Estructura constructiva ................................................................................................................12
3.6 Volumen de suministro ...............................................................................................................13
3.7 Dimensiones y pesos ...................................................................................................................13
4. Transporte / almacenamiento intermedio / eliminacin .....................................................................14
4.1 Transporte....................................................................................................................................14
4.2 Almacenamiento / conservacin..................................................................................................15
4.3 Devolucin ..................................................................................................................................15
4.4 Eliminacin .................................................................................................................................16
5. Colocacin / instalacin......................................................................................................................17
5.1 Normas de seguridad ...................................................................................................................17
5.2 Cimientos ....................................................................................................................................17
5.3 Colocacin del grupo de bombas ................................................................................................17
5.4 Tuberas .......................................................................................................................................18
5.5 Aislamiento .................................................................................................................................21
5.6 Alineacin del acoplamiento .......................................................................................................21
5.7 Alineacin de la bomba y del motor............................................................................................22
5.8 Conexin elctrica del grupo de bombas.....................................................................................23
6. Puesta en servicio / puesta fuera de servicio.......................................................................................25
6.1
Puesta en servicio........................................................................................................................25
6.2 Uso de la bomba ..........................................................................................................................29
6.3 Correccin del rodete ..................................................................................................................29
6.4 Lmites del margen de trabajo .....................................................................................................30
6.5 Desconexin de la bomba............................................................................................................31
6.6 Puesta fuera de servicio ...............................................................................................................31
7. Mantenimiento/conservacin/ inspeccin ..........................................................................................32
7.1 Normas de seguridad ...................................................................................................................32
7.2 Supervisin del funcionamiento ..................................................................................................33
7.3 Vaciado y eliminacin .................................................................................................................35
7.4 Desmontaje del grupo de bombas................................................................................................35
7.5 Inspeccin de componentes .........................................................................................................39
7.6 Montaje del grupo de bombas .....................................................................................................41
7.7 Pares de apriete de los tornillos ...................................................................................................45
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
2 de 60
ndice de contenido
8.
9.
Correccin de averas .........................................................................................................................47

Intercambiabilidad de piezas ..............................................................................................................49
9.1 Soporte de rodamiento 0..............................................................................................................49
9.2 Soporte de rodamiento I ..............................................................................................................50
9.3 Soporte de rodamiento II .............................................................................................................51
9.4 Soporte de rodamiento III............................................................................................................52
9.5 Soporte de rodamiento IV ...........................................................................................................53
9.6 Soporte de rodamiento V .............................................................................................................54
10.
Dibujos seccionales .........................................................................................................................55
10.1 Bomba .........................................................................................................................................55
10.2 Cierre de anillo deslizante ...........................................................................................................57
11.
Certificaciones .................................................................................................................................59
11.1 Declaracin de conformidad CE .................................................................................................59
11.2 Certificado de no objecin ..........................................................................................................60
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
3 de 60
1. Generalidades
1. Generalidades
Este manual de instrucciones describe el uso correcto y seguro en todas las fases de operacin de la
bomba.
El manual de instrucciones no considera las normativas locales cuyo cumplimiento es responsabilidad del
usuario.
La placa de caractersticas indica la serie y el tamao constructivo, los datos de servicio importantes, as
como el nmero de serie. El nmero de serie describe claramente la bomba / el grupo de bombas de forma
y sirve para su identificacin en todos los procesos posteriores.
En caso de defecto se deber informar sin demora al Departamento de Servicio posventa de la empresa
Dickow Pumpen con el fin de conservar los derechos de garanta.
Para el montaje de las unidades de sustitucin suministradas se tienen que observar los subcaptulos
correspondientes de "Mantenimiento, conservacin, inspeccin".
Documentos de aplicacin paralela:
-
Hoja de datos de la bomba

Plano de instalacin u hoja de medidas
Dibujo seccional
Listas de piezas
Documentacin de subproveedores
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
4 de 60
2. Seguridad
2. Seguridad
El manual de instrucciones contiene indicaciones bsicas para la instalacin, el funcionamiento y el
mantenimiento. Solo el cumplimiento de las indicaciones garantiza el manejo seguro de la bomba o del
grupo de bombas y evita daos personales y materiales.
Se deben observar todas las indicaciones para la seguridad contenidas en este manual de instrucciones.
el personal cualificado competente / el usuario debe leerse y comprender el manual de instrucciones antes
del montaje y de la puesta en servicio.
El manual de instrucciones tiene que estar disponible en todo momento in situ.
Los avisos y rtulos colocados en la bomba se tienen que observar y mantener en estado legible.
2.1 Identificacin de advertencias

Palabra de
sealizacin
Explicacin
PELIGRO
Sealiza un peligro inminente.

Si no se evita, las consecuencias son la muerte o lesiones de mxima
gravedad.
ADVERTENCIA
Sealiza una situacin potencialmente peligrosa.

Si no se evita, las consecuencias pueden ser la muerte o lesiones de
mxima gravedad.
PRECAUCIN
ATENCIN
Smbolo
Sealiza una situacin potencialmente peligrosa.

Si no se evita, las consecuencias pueden lesiones leves o
insignificantes.
Sealiza una situacin potencialmente daina.
Si no se evita, las consecuencias pueden ser peligros para la bomba y
su funcionamiento.
Explicacin
Smbolo de peligro general
Sealiza en combinacin con una palabra de sealizacin
peligros que conllevan la muerte o lesiones.
Tensin elctrica peligrosa
peligros relacionados con la tensin elctrica.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
5 de 60
2. Seguridad
Advertencia contra campos magnticos

peligros relacionados con campos magnticos.
Superficie caliente
peligros relacionados con superficies calientes.
Proteccin contra explosiones
Ofrece informacin para la proteccin contra explosiones en
atmsferas potencialmente explosivas segn la Directiva 94/9/CE.
Daos en la mquina
Sealiza en combinacin con la palabra de sealizacin ATENCIN
peligros para la bomba y su funcionamiento.
Nota
Ofrece recomendaciones e informacin til para el manejo del
producto.
2.2 Uso conforme a lo previsto

La bomba / el grupo de bombas solo se debe utilizar en el margen de trabajo descrito en la hoja de datos
de la bomba de aplicacin paralela. Esto rige, en particular, para el medio de bombeado, el caudal, la
velocidad de giro, la presin, la temperatura y la potencia del motor. Asimismo, se aplica lo siguiente:
La bomba solo se debe utilizar en estado tcnicamente impecable.

No se permite utilizar la bomba en estado parcialmente montado.
La bomba no se debe utilizar nunca sin medio de bombeado.
Observar las indicaciones sobre el caudal mnimo en la hoja de datos de la bomba o en el manual de
instrucciones.
Observar las indicaciones sobre el caudal mximo en la hoja de datos de la bomba o en el manual de
instrucciones.
No estrangular la bomba en el lado de aspiracin.
La velocidad de giro mxima es de 3500 rpm (+10 %).
2.3 Prevencin de usos errneos previsibles
Los rganos de cierre en el lado de impulsin no se deben abrir nunca ms all del margen admisible.
En este caso se superara el caudal mximo y existira un riesgo de daos por cavitacin.
No se deben superar nunca los lmites de uso admisibles indicados para la presin y la temperatura.
Observar y cumplir todas las indicaciones para la seguridad y dems instrucciones contenidas en el
manual de instrucciones.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
6 de 60
2. Seguridad
2.4 Cualificacin del personal

El personal debe mostrar la cualificacin correspondiente para el montaje, la operacin, el mantenimiento
y la inspeccin de la bomba / del grupo de bombas.
El mbito de responsabilidad, las competencias y la supervisin deben ser regulados detalladamente por
el usuario.
Eventuales lagunas de conocimiento del personal se tienen que eliminar mediante una formacin. La
formacin puede ser impartida por el personal cualificado de la empresa Dickow Pumpen.
2.5 Normas de seguridad adicionales

Adems de las indicaciones para la seguridad contenidas en este manual de instrucciones se aplican las
siguientes normas de seguridad adicionales:
Normas de prevencin de accidentes

Normas de proteccin contra explosiones
Normas de seguridad para la manipulacin de sustancias peligrosas
Normas y leyes aplicables
2.6 Indicaciones para la seguridad del usuario/operador
El usuario deber montar una proteccin contra el contacto con componentes calientes y fros.
No se permite retirar durante el funcionamiento la proteccin del acoplamiento y la proteccin contra
el contacto en la bomba / en el grupo de bombas.
Conectar siempre la puesta a tierra del grupo de bombas.
Facilitar el equipo de proteccin al personal e imponer su utilizacin.
Evacuar las fugas de medios de bombeado peligrosos de manera que no se produzca ningn riesgo
para las personas ni para el medio ambiente. Observar las disposiciones legales.
Excluir todo peligro por energa elctrica.
2.7 Indicaciones para la seguridad en trabajos de

mantenimiento, inspeccin y montaje
Solo se permite realizar trabajos de transformacin o modificaciones en la bomba previa consulta

a la empresa Dickow Pumpen.
Utilizar nicamente piezas originales o componentes aprobados por la empresa Dickow Pumpen.
Ejecutar los trabajos en la bomba / en el grupo de bombas nicamente en estado parado.
La caja de bomba debe haber alcanzado la temperatura ambiente.
La bomba debe estar sin presin y vaca.
Observar el procedimiento para la puesta fuera de servicio segn el captulo 6.6.
Descontaminar las bombas utilizadas con medios peligrosos para la salud. Observar el captulo 4.4.
Al finalizar los trabajos, volver a montar la proteccin del acoplamiento y la proteccin contra el
contacto.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
7 de 60
2. Seguridad
Los trabajos en el grupo de bombas solo se deben ejecutar con las conexiones elctricas
desembornadas.
Asegurar el grupo de bombas contra la conexin accidental.
2.8 Incumplimiento del manual de instrucciones

El incumplimiento de este manual de instrucciones causa la prdida de los derechos de garanta e
indemnizacin. El incumplimiento conlleva los siguientes riesgos:
Peligro para las personas por influencias elctricas, trmicas, mecnicas y qumicas.
Peligros por explosin.
Peligros por el fallo de funciones importantes.
Peligro para el medio ambiente en caso de fugas de sustancias peligrosas.
2.9 Indicaciones sobre la proteccin contra explosiones

PELIGRO
Las indicaciones contenidas en este captulo se tienen que observar

estrictamente para el funcionamiento en atmsferas potencialmente peligrosas
2.9.1
El uso de bombas en atmsferas potencialmente peligrosas solo se permite con

la identificacin correspondiente.
Las bombas deben estar declaradas para esta aplicacin segn la hoja de datos
de la bomba.
Garantizar el uso conforme a lo previsto.
Evitar estrictamente cualquier funcionamiento inadmisible.
Para el funcionamiento segn la Directiva 94/9/CE (ATEX) se aplican unas
condiciones especiales. El smbolo que se muestra junto a estas lneas identifica
los apartados de este manual de instrucciones que se debern observar
especialmente.
Temperatura de superficie
Las temperaturas de superficie ms altas se pueden esperar en la caja de bomba, en el contraanillo del
cierre de anillo deslizante en el lado de la atmsfera y en la zona de los rodamientos. La temperatura de
superficie en la caja de bomba corresponde a la temperatura del medio de bombeado.
En la zona del soporte de cojinete debe existir un contacto libre de la superficie con el entorno. No se
permite aislar el soporte de cojinete.
La temperatura a esperar en el contraanillo en el lado de la atmsfera y la determinacin de la temperatura
admisible del medio de bombeado o la temperatura de trabajo del lquido de obturacin para el cierre de
anillo deslizante (GLRD) con fuelle metlico DICKOW N6, N9, N10, N11 y N13 resulta de las siguientes
frmulas.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
8 de 60
2. Seguridad
Clase de
temperatura
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Tmx superficie [C]

450 *
300
200
135
100
85
* Temperatura de trabajo mx. cierre de anillo deslizante con fuelle metlico DICKOW = 350C
Velocidad de
giro [rpm]
1450-1750
2900-3500
Clase 1
Clase 2
Clase 3
=
=
=
Clase 1
TGLRD [K]
Clase 2
Clase 3
20
35
25
45
40
60
Agua y medios similares

Otros medios
Aceites
Emparejamiento
de
anillos
deslizantes - abreviatura
SiC / SiC
U.U.
SiC / carbono U.A.
Factor K
0,75
1,0
Temperatura en el componente del lado de la atmsfera del cierre de anillo deslizante

TGLRD =
T + (K TGLRD)
T = temperatura del medio de bombeado o del lquido de
obturacin
Temperatura admisible del medio de bombeado o del lquido de obturacin

Tadm =
Tmx - (K TGLRD) - TS
TS = reduccin por seguridad ; clases T6-T3 = 5
Clases T2/T1 = 10 C
NOTA
En caso de utilizar cierres de anillo deslizante de otros fabricantes, observar el
manual de instrucciones del fabricante en cuestin.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
9 de 60
2. Seguridad
2.9.2
Dispositivo de vigilancia
La bomba solo se debe utilizar dentro de los valores lmite indicados en la hoja de datos de la bomba y en
la placa de caractersticas.
Si el usuario no puede garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de servicio, se deben prever dispositivos
de vigilancia.
Srvase consultar a la empresa Dickow Pumpen para obtener ms informacin sobre dispositivos de
vigilancia.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
10 de 60
3. Descripcin
3. Descripcin
3.1 Descripcin general
Esta bomba se utiliza en todas las aplicaciones de la industria qumica, petroqumica y general en las
cuales se tienen que bombear lquidos agresivos.
3.2
Designacin
Ejemplo: NCL b h 32/210 A Ge
NCL
3.3
Serie
Versin especial constructiva, p.ej. b = con calefaccin
Versin de material, p. ej. h = 1.4408 / 1.4571
32
Anchura nominal tubuladura de impulsin [mm]
210
Dimetro nominal rodete [mm]
Volumen de suministro, p. ej. A = extremo de eje libre
Ge
Junta de eje; p. ej. Ge = cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado, descargado
Asignacin tamao constructivo/soporte de

rodamiento
soporte de
rodamiento
tamao
constructivo
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
II
III
IV
26/170
26/210
32/165
32/210
40/165
40/210
50/165
50/210
32/250
40/250
40/320
50/250
50/330
65/165
65/210
65/250
80/165
80/210
80/250
100/210
65/320
80/320
100/250
100/320
100/400
125/250
125/320
125/400
150/250
150/320
150/400
150/500
200/260
200/320
200/400
200/500
250/320
250/400
250/500
11 de 60
3. Descripcin
3.4 Identificacin
3.4.1
Placa de caractersticas
Fig. 1: Placa de caractersticas en alemn y en ingls
3.4.2
Identificacin segn la Directiva CE de proteccin contra explosiones

Grupo II
Categora 2
Uso en ambientes con gas/vapor/neblina
Proteccin a travs de la seguridad constructiva EN
13464-5
ver abajo
Nmero de referencia de la documentacin tcnica
Fig. 2: Placa de caractersticas ATEX
La temperatura de la superficie no depende de la fuente de ignicin, sino de la temperatura del medio de

bombeado. No se realiza ninguna identificacin con una clase de temperatura o una temperatura. En la
identificacin se incorpora el smbolo"X". En el captulo 2.9.1 se menciona la temperatura que se produce
en la superficie. Observar las indicaciones en la hoja de datos de la bomba.
3.5 Estructura constructiva

Tipo de construccin
Bomba de caja espiral
Instalacin horizontal
una etapa
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
12 de 60
3. Descripcin
Se cumplen los requisitos segn ISO 5199

Dimensiones segn EN 22858
Caja de bomba
Espiral simple / espiral doble en funcin del tamao
Divisin radial
Pies o garras integrados por fundicin
Rodete
Cerrado o abierto
Los labes posteriores y los orificios de descarga y/o de inyector descargan el empuje axial
Cojinetes
En el lado del motor, rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular emparejado como cojinete fijo
En el lado de la bomba, rodamiento de rodillos cilndricos
Lubricacin por aceite
opcionalmente: lubricacin por grasa
Junta de eje
Empaquetadura para prensaestopas
Cierre de anillo deslizante simple o doble
Cierres de cartucho (cartridge)
3.6
Volumen de suministro
Segn la versin, el volumen de suministro comprende los siguientes elementos:
Bomba
Acoplamiento elstico con o sin elemento de desmontaje
Proteccin del acoplamiento
Placa base de fundicin o bastidor soldado en versin rgida a la torsin
Motor de accionamiento
En su caso, accesorios especiales adicionales
3.7
Dimensiones y pesos
Datos sobre las dimensiones y los pesos figuran en el plano de instalacin / la hoja de medidas.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
13 de 60
4. Transporte / almacenamiento intermedio / eliminacin
4. Transporte / almacenamiento
intermedio / eliminacin
4.1
Transporte
PELIGRO
Deslizamiento de la bomba / del grupo de bombas de la suspensin

Peligro de muerte en caso de cada de elementos!
Transportar la bomba / el grupo de bombas nicamente en posicin horizontal.

La bomba no se debe suspender nunca por el extremo del eje libre.
El grupo de bombas no se deben suspender nunca por la argolla del motor.
No se permite la estancia debajo de cargas suspendidas.
Observar las indicaciones de pesos en el plano de instalacin.
Observar las normas locales para la prevencin de accidentes.
Utilizar medios de fijacin apropiados y homologados.
Fig. 3: Transporte de la bomba
Fig. 4: Transporte del grupo de bombas

completo
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Fig. 5: Transporte de la bomba en la placa base
14 de 60
4.2
Almacenamiento / conservacin
Daos por humedad o suciedad durante el almacenamiento
ATENCIN
Corrosin y/o ensuciamiento de la bomba!
En caso de almacenamiento en el exterior, cubrir la bomba o la bomba

embalada y los accesorios para protegerlos del agua.
Orificios y puntos de conexin hmedos, sucios o daados
ATENCIN
Fugas o defectos en la bomba!
Los orificios cerrados solo se deben poner al descubierto durante la

instalacin.
Recomendamos tomar las siguientes medidas para el almacenamiento de la bomba o del grupo de
bombas:
Almacenar la bomba en un local seco y protegido con una humedad del aire constante.
Girar el rbol manualmente una vez al mes.
Las bombas nuevas fabricadas con los materiales GGG y fundicin de acero ferrtico estn sometidas a un
tratamiento previo interno con un producto anticorrosivo y Dewatering-Fluid. El perodo de
almacenamiento mximo en caso de almacenamiento seco es de mx. 12 meses.
Para el almacenamiento de una bomba que ya haya sido utilizada, observar el captulo 6.6.
4.3
Devolucin
Vaciar correctamente la bomba. Observar el captulo 7.3.

La bomba se debe aclarar y limpiar siempre, sobre todo si ha funcionado con medios nocivos,
explosivos, calientes o que conlleven otro tipo de riesgos.
La bomba se debe acompaar siempre con un certificado de inocuidad completamente rellenado. Ver
el captulo 11.2.
NOTA
Si es necesario, se puede descargar un certificado de inocuidad de

Internet en www.dickow.de.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
15 de 60
4.4
Eliminacin
ADVERTENCIA
Medios de bombeado peligrosos para la salud

Peligro para las personas y el medio ambiente!
Recoger y eliminar el lquido de aclarado y el lquido

restante.
Llevar ropa protectora y una mascarilla protectora.
Observar las disposiciones legales para la eliminacin de
lquidos peligrosos para la salud.
1.
Desmontar la bomba / el grupo de bombas.
2.
Recoger las grasas y los aceites.
3.
Clasificar los materiales de la bomba.
4.
Eliminar todo conforme a la normativa local.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
16 de 60
5. Colocacin / instalacin
5.1 Normas de seguridad
PELIGRO
Colocacin incorrecta en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas

Peligro de explosin!
Observar las normas para la proteccin contra explosiones vigentes a nivel local.
Observar las indicaciones en la hoja de datos de la bomba y la placa de
caractersticas de la bomba / del motor.
5.2 Cimientos
ADVERTENCIA
Colocacin en cimientos sin afirmar y no portantes

Daos personales y materiales!
5.3
5.3.1
Es necesario asegurar una resistencia suficiente del hormign

(mn. clase XO) de los cimientos (DIN 1045).
Colocar el grupo de bombas nicamente en cimientos fraguados.
Colocar el grupo de bombas nicamente en una superficie
horizontal y plana.
Observar las indicaciones de pesos en el plano de instalacin.
Colocacin del grupo de bombas

Colocacin de los cimientos
1.
Colocar el grupo de bombas en los cimientos y alinearlos con un nivel de agua. Desviacin de
posicin admisible 0,2 mm/m.
2.
Insertar chapas niveladoras para la compensacin de la altura. Colocarlas siempre en ambos

lados en la proximidad inmediata de los tornillos de anclaje, entre el bastidor base y los
cimientos.
Con una distancia entre los tornillos de anclaje de > 600 mm, colocar adicionalmente chapas
niveladoras en el centro, entre los tornillos de anclaje.
3.
4.
Todas las chapas niveladoras deben estar aplicadas en posicin plana.
5.
Enganchar los tornillos de anclaje en los orificios previstos.
6.
Sellar los tornillos de anclaje con hormign.
7.
Alinear el bastidor base una vez que el hormign haya fraguado.
8.
Apretar los tornillos de anclaje firme y uniformemente.
9.
Sellar el bastidor base con hormign antivibratorio de granulacin normal con una relacin
agua/cemento (R A/C) de 0,5. Establecer la consistencia fluida por medio de un fluidificante.
Realizar un tratamiento posterior del hormign segn DIN 1045.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
17 de 60
5.3.2
Colocacin sin cimientos
Para la colocacin sin cimientos, la base debe mostrar la resistencia y las caractersticas necesarias.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Colocar el grupo de bombas en los elementos de ajuste y nivelarlo con un nivel de agua.
Para la compensacin de la altura, aflojar el tornillo y la contratuerca en los elementos de ajuste.
Reajustar la tuerca de ajuste hasta que las eventuales diferencias de altura queden compensadas.
Apretar las contratuercas en los elementos de ajuste.
5.4
Tuberas
PELIGRO
Superacin de las cargas admisibles en las tubuladuras de bomba

Peligro de muerte en caso de escapes de medio de bombeado caliente, txico,
corrosivo o inflamable por falta de estanqueidad!
5.4.1
No se permite utilizar la bomba como punto fijo para la tubera.

Apoyar la tubera inmediatamente antes de la bomba y conectarla sin tensiones.
Observar las fuerzas y los pares admisibles en las tubuladuras. Ver el captulo
5.4.2.
Compensar la expansin de la tubera al aumentar la temperatura.
Tubera de aspiracin
La trayectoria de la tubera de aspiracin se tiene que ejecutar con un cuidado especial. Los valores NPSH
de la bomba y la instalacin deben estar definidos claramente. Se deber tener en cuenta lo siguiente:
Los codos no se deben conectar directamente a la tubuladura de aspiracin. Se deber prever un

tramo de entrada recto. Longitud mn. 2 veces el dimetro de la tubera de aspiracin.
No se debe conectar nunca una tubera de aspiracin con un dimetro nominal mayor directamente
a la bomba. Las turbulencias reducen la seccin de entrada libre. Utilizar una pieza de empalme
excntrica. Observar las figuras!
Fig. 6: Turbulencias
Fig. 7: Conexin excntrica
Para el funcionamiento de aspiracin, tender la tubera de aspiracin con un ascenso continuo hacia
la tubuladura de aspiracin. Evitar la formacin de bolsas de aire.
Para el funcionamiento de afluencia, tender la tubera de aspiracin con un descenso continuo hacia
la tubuladura de aspiracin. Evitar la formacin de bolsas de aire para asegurar una purga de aire
completa.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
18 de 60
No se debe sobrepasar la velocidad de flujo mxima de 2 m/s.
ATENCIN
Perlas de soldadura, cascarilla y otras impurezas en la tubera

Daos en la bomba!
Limpiar a fondo la tubera antes de conectar la bomba.

Eliminar las impurezas de las tuberas.
Insertar un filtro si es necesario.
Utilizar filtros con una abertura de malla de 0,5 mm.

Insertar un filtro con la triple seccin transversal de la tubera.
NOTA
5.4.2
Fuerzas y pares admisibles en las tubuladuras
Tamao
constructivo
26/125 - 210
32/165 - 250
40/125 - 320
50/125 - 330
65/125 - 320
80/165 - 320
100/210 - 400
125/250 - 400
150/250 - 500
200/250 - 500
250/320 - 500
Tubuladura de aspiracin
DN
40
1 "
50
2"
65
3"
80
3"
100
4"
125
6"
125
6"
150
6"
200
8"
250
10"
300
12"
Fx [N]
GGG GS
Fy [N]
GGG GS
Fz [N]
GGG GS
F [N]
GGG GS
Mx [Nm]
GGG GS
My [Nm]
GGG GS
Mz [Nm]
GGG GS
M [Nm]
GGG GS
556
875
490
770
445
700
860
1360
580
910
400
630
470
735
840
1330
735
1155
670
1050
600
945
1150
1820
625
1022
445
700
515
805
910
1430
935
1470
825
1295
760
1190
1460
2310
670
1050
490
770
535
840
970
1540
1115
1750
1000
1575
915
1435
1750
2760
715
1120
515
805
580
910
1040
1640
1490
2345
1335
2100
1200
1890
2330
3670
780
1225
560
875
645
1015 1150
1820
1760
2765
1580
2485
1425
2240
2750
4340
935
1470
670
1050
845
1330 1350
2130
1760
2765
1580
2485
1425
2240
2750
4340
935
1470
670
1050
845
1330 1350
2130
2225
3500
2000
3150
1800
2835
3480
5490
1115
1750
780
1225
915
1435 1620
2550
2980
4690
2670
4200
2400
3780
4640
7310
1445
2275
1025 1610 1180 1855 2130
3360
4245
5845
3785
5215
3430
4725
6620
9130
2260
3115
1600 2205 1855 2555 3320
4580
5080
7000
4550
6265
4090
5635
7950 10950 3075
4235
2185 3010 2515 3465 4520
6230
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
19 de 60
Tamao
constructivo
26/125 - 210
32/165 - 250
40/125 - 320
50/125 - 330
65/125 - 320
80/165 - 320
100/210 - 400
125/250 - 400
150/250 - 500
200/250 - 500
250/320 - 500
Tubuladura de impulsin
DN
25
1"
32
1 "
40
1 "
50
2"
65
3"
80
3"
100
4"
125
6"
150
6"
200
8"
250
10"
Fx [N]
GGG GS
Fy [N]
GGG GS
Fz [N]
GGG
GS
F [N]
GGG
GS
Mx [Nm]
GGG
GS
My [Nm]
GGG GS
Mz [Nm]
GGG GS
M [Nm]
GGG
GS
335
525
315
490
380
595
570
910
400
630
270
420
315
490
570
910
400
630
380
595
470
735
730
1150
490
770
335
525
380
595
710
1120
490
770
445
700
560
875
860
1360
580
910
400
630
470
735
840
1330
670
1050
600
945
735
1155
1150
1820
625
980
445
700
515
805
910
1430
825
1295
755
1190
935
1470
1460
2310
670
1050
490
770
535
840
970
1540
1000
1575
915
1435
1111
1750
1750
2760
715
1120
515
805
580
910
1040
1640
1335
2100
1200
1890
1490
2345
2330
3670
780
1225
560
875
645
1015
1150
1820
1580
2485
1425
2240
1760
2765
2750
4340
935
1470
670
1050
845
1330
1350
2130
2000
3150
1800
2835
2225
3500
3480
5490
1115
1750
780
1225
915
1435
1620
2550
2670
4200
2400
3780
2980
4690
4640
7310
1445
2275
1025
1610
1180
1855
2130
3360
3790
5215
3430
4725
4245
5845
6620
9130
2260
3115
1600
2205
1855
2555
3320
4580
Las fuerzas y los pares se refieren a una temperatura de 20 C. Valores de correccin en funcin de la
temperatura: ver la figura.
Fig. 8: Diagrama de correccin de temperatura

Si no todas las cargas aplicadas alcanzan los valores mximas, una de estas cargas puede sobrepasar el
valor mximo en las siguientes condiciones:
La superacin est limitada al 140% del valor admisible.

Para las fuerzas y los pares efectivos que actan en cada brida se aplica lo siguiente:
/F/ actual
/F/ mx. admisible
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
/M/ actual

/M/ mx. admisible
20 de 60
5.5
Aislamiento
Los elementos de la caja que se encuentran en contacto con el
producto toman la temperatura del medio de bombeado.
ADVERTENCIA
Peligro de quemaduras!
Aislar los elementos de la caja.

Montar un dispositivo de proteccin.
Acumulacin de calor en el soporte de cojinete
ATENCIN
Daos en el cojinete!
5.6
No se permite aislar los soportes de cojinete.
Alineacin del acoplamiento
PELIGRO
Temperaturas improcedentes en el acoplamiento o en los rodamientos en caso

de alineacin defectuosa del acoplamiento
ADVERTENCIA
Asegurar en todo momento la alineacin correcta del acoplamiento.

Conexin accidental del grupo de bombas
Peligro de lesiones por elementos mviles!
ATENCIN
Los trabajos en el grupo de bombas solo se deben ejecutar con las

conexiones elctricas desembornadas.
Decalaje de los rboles de la bomba y del motor

Daos en la bomba, en el motor y en el acoplamiento!
Controlar siempre el acoplamiento despus de conectar la tubera.

Realizar el control del acoplamiento tambin en grupos de bombas entregados
sobre una placa base comn.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
21 de 60
Fig. 9: Decalaje angular y radial de acoplamientos
Fig. 10: Alineacin del acoplamiento

1.
Desmontar la proteccin del acoplamiento.
2.
Soltar el pie de apoyo.
3.
Colocar una regla de canto agudo (1) axialmente encima de la mitad de acoplamiento.
4.
Un eventual decalaje radial Kr queda visible por la rendija de luz.

Mejor: Medir el decalaje radial determinando las distancias A y B en tres puntos decalados en 120.
El acoplamiento est alineado correctamente si existe en todos los puntos la misma distancia frente
al rbol.
5.
Comprobar en toda la circunferencia la distancia s1 entre las mitades de acoplamiento. El

acoplamiento est alineado correctamente si existe en todos los puntos la misma distancia.
6.
Con respecto a la desviacin admisible s1 y Kr de las dos mitades de acoplamiento, observar

las indicaciones segn el manual de instrucciones del fabricante del acoplamiento!
7.
Atornillar el pie de apoyo.
8.
Montar la proteccin del acoplamiento.
5.7
Alineacin de la bomba y del motor
ADVERTENCIA
Acoplamiento rotatorio abierto

Peligro de lesiones por el rbol en rotacin!
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Utilizar el grupo de bombas nicamente con la proteccin del

acoplamiento.
Elegir la proteccin del acoplamiento conforme a las directivas aplicables.
22 de 60
PELIGRO
Peligro de ignicin por chispas producidas por friccin

Elegir el material para la proteccin del acoplamiento de manera que no se

produzca ninguna proyeccin de chispas en caso de contacto.
Observar EN 13463-1.
Despus de la colocacin del grupo de bombas y la conexin de la tubera, controlar la alineacin del
acoplamiento y reajustarlo, en su caso, en el motor.
Compensar eventuales diferencias de altura con la ayuda de una chapa espaciadora.
1.
Desmontar la proteccin del acoplamiento.
2.
Controlar la alineacin del acoplamiento. Observar el procedimiento segn el captulo 5.6.
3.
Soltar la tuerca hexagonal en los pies del motor.
4.
Colocar chapas espaciadoras debajo de los pies del motor hasta que la diferencia de altura quede
compensada.
Apretar las tuercas hexagonales en los pies del motor.
5.
6.
7.
Comprobar el funcionamiento del acoplamiento / rbol. El acoplamiento se debe poder girar

fcilmente a mano.
Montar la proteccin del acoplamiento.
8.
Controlar la distancia entre el acoplamiento y la proteccin del acoplamiento.
5.8
Conexin elctrica del grupo de bombas
PELIGRO
Instalacin elctrica inadecuada

PELIGRO
Para la instalacin elctrica se tiene que observar adicionalmente IEC

60079-14.
Los motores protegidos contra explosiones se tienen que conectar
siempre a travs de un guardamotor.
Trabajos en el grupo de bombas por personal no cualificado

Peligro de muerte por electrocucin!
ADVERTENCIA
La conexin elctrica debe ser establecida nicamente por un

electricista cualificado.
Observar las normas IEC 30364 e IEC 60079.
Conexin de red incorrecta

Cortocircuito!
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Observar las condiciones de conexin de las empresas de suministro

de energa locales.
23 de 60
Procedimiento:
1.
Comparar la tensin de red existente con los datos que figuran en la placa de caractersticas del
motor.
Elegir un conexionado apropiado.
Comparar el sentido de giro del motor con el sentido de giro de la bomba. Observar la flecha
indicadora del sentido de giro en la bomba!
2.
3.
NOTA
Observar las instrucciones de servicio adjuntas al motor!
5.8.1
Comprobar el sentido de giro
PELIGRO
Aumento de la temperatura en caso de contacto entre los elementos

ATENCIN
No se debe comprobar nunca el sentido de giro con la bomba en seco.

Desacoplar la bomba para comprobar el sentido de giro.
Sentido de giro equivocado del motor y la bomba

Daos en la bomba!
Observar la flecha indicadora del sentido de giro en la bomba.
1.
Arrancar brevemente el motor. Observar el sentido de giro del motor.
2.
El sentido de giro del motor debe coincidir con la flecha indicadora del sentido de giro en la
bomba.
Si el sentido de giro est equivocado, invertir el cable de alimentacin de red en la caja de
bornes del motor.
3.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
24 de 60
6. Puesta en servicio / puesta fuera de servicio
6. Puesta en servicio / puesta fuera de

servicio
6.1 Puesta en servicio
Antes de la puesta en servicio, comprobar los siguientes puntos:
Se ha establecido correctamente la conexin electrnica del grupo de bombas con todos los
dispositivos de proteccin.
La bomba se llena con medio de bombeado.
Se ha comprobado el sentido de giro.
Todas las conexiones adicionales han sido establecidas y estn operativas.
Se han comprobado los lubricantes.
Al cabo de una parada prolongada, observar y ejecutar las medidas descritas en el captulo 7
Mantenimiento/conservacin/inspeccin.
6.1.1
Carga de lubricante
ATENCIN
Demasiado poco aceite lubricante en el depsito de reserva del regulador de

nivel de aceite
Daos en los rodamientos!
ATENCIN
Controlar regularmente el nivel de aceite.

El depsito de reserva siempre debe estar llenado suficientemente.
Demasiado poco aceite lubricante en el soporte del rodamiento

Daos en los rodamientos!
El agujero roscado del regulador de nivel de aceite debe encontrarse en

posicin horizontal.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
25 de 60
1.
2.
3.
Desenroscar el tornillo de purga (1).

Abatir el regulador de nivel de aceite (2) apartndolo del soporte de rodamiento (3) y sujetarlo.
Introducir aceite a travs del orificio para el tornillo de purga (1) hasta que el aceite entre en el
ngulo de conexin del regulador de nivel de aceite (2).
Llenar el depsito de reserva hasta el mximo.
Volver a colocar el regulador de nivel de aceite (2) en su posicin bsica.
Enroscar el tornillo de purga (1).
Controlar al cabo de unos minutos el nivel de aceite en el depsito de reserva del regulador del
nivel de aceite (2). Repetir los pasos 4 - 6 las veces que haga falta hasta que ya no salga ms aceite
del depsito de reserva.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NOTA
Un nivel de aceite excesivo causa un aumento de la temperatura, falta de
estanqueidad o fugas de aceite.
Volumen de carga y calidad del aceite: ver el captulo 7.2.2.

En la versin con lubricacin por grasa se suprimen el regulador del nivel de aceite y el tornillo de
purga. Los rodamientos tienen lubricacin permanente por grasa. No requieren ningn reengrase.
6.1.2
Llenar y purgar la bomba
PELIGRO
Formacin de un ambiente explosivo en el interior de la bomba

1.
2.
3.
6.1.3
La bomba debe estar siempre llena de medio de bombeado.

Se deben prever unas medidas de vigilancia al efecto.
Purgar la bomba y la tubera de aspiracin y llenarla con medio de bombeado.

La bomba es autopurgante.
Abrir completamente el rgano de cierre en la tubera de aspiracin.
Abrir completamente todas las conexiones adicionales (p. ej., circulacin externa, alimentacin
externa).
Junta de eje
La bomba se suministra con una junta de eje montada. Llenar un depsito de alimentacin previsto segn
el manual de instrucciones del depsito.
En caso de cierres de anillo deslizante doble, antes de conectar la bomba conectar una aplicacin de
presin de bloqueo segn el manual de instrucciones del depsito o del cierre de anillo deslizante.
En caso de alimentacin externa de la bomba, alimentar la bomba con las cantidades y presiones que se
indican en la hoja de datos de la bomba o en el plano de instalacin.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
26 de 60

6.1.4
Versin con calefaccin
La caja de la bomba y las cajas intermedias pueden tener calefaccin en caso necesario.
Medios de transmisin de calor admisibles:
Agua caliente
Vapor de agua
Aceite portador de calor
Lmites de presin y temperatura:
tmx = 200 C
pmx = 25 bar
ATENCIN
Temperatura de superficie excesiva

ATENCIN
Observar la clase de temperatura admisible.
Falta de medio de transmisin de calor

Daos en la bomba!
ATENCIN
Preparar una cantidad suficiente de un medio de transmisin de calor

apropiado.
Tiempo de calentamiento demasiado corto

Daos en la bomba!
ATENCIN
Prestar atencin al calentamiento suficiente de la bomba (aprox. 2 horas).

Prestar atencin al movimiento libre del rbol de bomba.
Superacin de la temperatura admisible del medio de transmisin de calor

Escapes de medio de bombeado o de transmisin de calor!
6.1.5
Observar los lmites de empleo de presin y de temperatura.
Controlar la junta de eje
Un cierre de anillo deslizante es una junta dinmica que, por motivos fsicos y tcnicos, no puede estar
libre de fugas. La cantidad de la fuga est determinada por el diseo, las tolerancias, las condiciones de
funcionamiento, la suavidad de marcha, etc.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
27 de 60

Una fuga elevada durante el proceso normal de rodaje de las superficies deslizantes se reduce a una
cantidad normal con el transcurso del tiempo de funcionamiento. Si no fuera este el caso, el cierre de
anillo deslizante se deber detener, desmontar y comprobar.
Una empaquetadura para prensaestopas debe gotear ligeramente durante el funcionamiento.
PELIGRO
Formacin de
prensaestopas
sobretemperatura
en
las
empaquetaduras
para
Las empaquetaduras para prensaestopas no son apropiadas para ser

utilizadas en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas.
Para ajustar la fuga en el prensaestopas, proceder de la siguiente manera:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Apretar solo ligeramente a mano las tuercas del casquete prensaestopas.

Controlar con ayuda de un calibre de empaquetadura el asiento en ngulo recto y centrado.
Despus de llenar la bomba, debe existir una fuga.
Apretar las tuercas del casquete prensaestopas de manera que la fuga se reduzca a 60-120
gotas por minuto.
Arrancar la bomba.
Al cabo de 5 minutos de funcionamiento, apretar 1/6 de vuelta las tuercas del casquete
prensaestopas para reducir la fuga.
Observar la fuga.
Fuga demasiado elevada
Repetir los pasos 6 y 7.
Fuga demasiado baja
Aflojar un poco las tuercas del casquete prensaestopas.
Ninguna fuga
Desconectar inmediatamente el grupo de bombas. Aflojar el

casquete prensaestopas y repetir el proceso.
6.1.6
Conectar la bomba
PELIGRO
Superacin de los lmites de presin y de temperatura admisibles

Peligro de explosin! Escapes de medio de bombeado caliente o txico!
PELIGRO
No se deben utilizar nunca la bomba con los rganos de cierre cerrados en

la tubera de aspiracin y/o de impulsin.
Arrancar el grupo de bombas nicamente contra un rgano de cierre
ligeramente abierto en el lado de impulsin.
Sobretemperatura en caso de funcionamiento en seco

NCL ES4 04.14.doc
La bomba no se debe utilizar nunca en estado sin llenar.

Llenar la bomba siempre correctamente.
Utilizar la bomba nicamente en el margen de trabajo admisible.
28 de 60
1.
Abrir completamente el rgano de cierre en la tubera de afluencia/aspiracin.
2.
Abrir ligeramente el rgano de cierre en la tubera de impulsin.
3.
4.
Conectar el motor.
Si el manmetro indica presin, abrir el rgano de cierre en el lado de impulsin hasta que se
haya alcanzado el punto de trabajo.
5.
Cuando se alcanza la temperatura de servicio, controlar la alineacin del acoplamiento y

reajustarlo si es necesario.
6.2
Uso de la bomba
ADVERTENCIA
Temperaturas elevadas de la superficie al trabajar con medios de

bombeado calientes
Peligro de quemaduras!
ATENCIN
Evitar el contacto con la superficie de la bomba.

Llevar ropa protectora.
Ruidos, vibraciones o temperaturas anormales o fugas

Daos en la bomba!
Desconectar inmediatamente el grupo de bombas.

El grupo de bombas solo se debe volver a poner en servicio una vez que se
hayan eliminado las causas.
6.3 Correccin del rodete

Los rodetes estn descargados hidrulicamente para la compensacin del empuje. Adicionalmente al uso
de los anillos de desgaste, la compensacin se realiza individualmente o en combinacin con:
labes posteriores
orificios de descarga
orificios de inyector
Se puede realizar una correccin del dimetro del rodete dentro del intervalo indicado en la hoja de curvas
caractersticas.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
29 de 60
6.4 Lmites del margen de trabajo

PELIGRO
Superacin de los lmites de uso con respecto a presin, temperatura y

velocidad de giro
Peligro de explosin! Escapes de medio de bombeado caliente o txico!
6.4.1
Observar los datos de servicio admisibles indicados en la hoja de datos de la

bomba.
Evitar el funcionamiento con el rgano de cierre cerrado.
No utilizar la bomba nunca a una temperatura ms alta que la indicada en la
hoja de datos de la bomba.
Caudal
Salvo indicacin contraria en la hoja de datos de la bomba, se aplica lo siguiente:

Qmn
Qmx
=
=
6.4.2
0,25 x Qpt
1,2 x Qpt
Frecuencia de cambios
PELIGRO
Temperatura de superficie del motor demasiado alta

En motores protegidos contra explosiones, observar las indicaciones sobre la

frecuencia de cambios contenidas en el manual de instrucciones del motor.
La frecuencia de cambios queda determinada por el aumento de temperatura mximo admisible del motor
y depende de las reservas de potencia del motor durante el funcionamiento y de las condiciones de
arranque.
NOTA
Observar el manual de instrucciones del fabricante del motor!
6.4.3
Medios abrasivos o sustancias slidas
Si se bombean medios de bombeado con componentes abrasivos o sustancias slidas, se debe prever un
mayor desgaste. Los intervalos de inspeccin se deben reducir frente a los tiempos usuales.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
30 de 60
6.5 Desconexin de la bomba

1. El rgano de cierre en la tubera de aspiracin permanece abierto.
2. Cerrar el rgano de cierre en la tubera de impulsin.
3. Desconectar el motor y prestar atencin a su giro estable hasta la parada.
NOTA
Si est instalada una vlvula de retencin en la tubera de impulsin, el rgano de
cierre puede permanecer abierto. Debe existir una contrapresin.
En caso de parada prolongada, se deben observar los siguientes puntos:
Evacuar completamente los medios que tienden a la polimerizacin, cristalizacin o solidificacin.

En su caso, aclarar la bomba con un lquido apropiado.
Cerrar el rgano de cierre en la tubera de aspiracin.
Cerrar las conexiones adicionales.
6.6 Puesta fuera de servicio

El grupo de bombas permanece instalado en la tubera:
Prever un volumen de lquido suficiente para el ciclo de funcionamiento.

Conectar el grupo de bombas regularmente en intervalos mensuales a trimestrales.
El grupo de bombas se desmonta y almacena:
Vaciar correctamente la bomba.

Observar las indicaciones para la seguridad en el captulo 7.1 / 7.3.
Rociar el interior de la caja de bomba con agente anticorrosivo. Esto no es necesario en bombas de
acero inoxidable.
Pulverizar el agente anticorrosivo por las tubuladuras de aspiracin y de impulsin.
Cerrar las bridas de aspiracin y de impulsin.
Cubrir todas las superficies brillantes en el exterior de la bomba con aceite o grasa sin silicona.
Observar las indicaciones adicionales en el captulo 4.2.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
31 de 60
7. Mantenimiento / conservacin / inspeccin
7. Mantenimiento/conservacin/
inspeccin
7.1
Normas de seguridad
PELIGRO
Mantenimiento inadecuado del grupo de bombas

ADVERTENCIA
Efectuar regularmente el mantenimiento del grupo de bombas.

Crear un plan de mantenimiento.
Conexin accidental del grupo de bombas

Peligro de lesiones por elementos mviles!
ADVERTENCIA
Los trabajos en el grupo de bombas solo se deben ejecutar con las conexiones
elctricas desembornadas.
Medios de bombeado calientes

Peligro de lesiones!
ADVERTENCIA
Dejar que el grupo de bombas se enfre hasta la temperatura ambiente.

Observar las disposiciones legales.

Al vaciar el medio de bombeado, tomar las medidas oportunas para la
proteccin de las personas y del medio ambiente.
Descontaminar las bombas.
El usuario debe asegurar que todos los trabajos de mantenimiento, inspeccin y montaje sean ejecutados
por personal tcnico cualificado. Este personal debe informarse suficientemente mediante el estudio de
las instrucciones de servicio.
Un plan de mantenimiento permite evitar reparaciones caras con un mnimo de trabajo.
Se debe evitar cualquier aplicacin de fuerza en el grupo de bombas.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
32 de 60
7.2
Supervisin del funcionamiento
PELIGRO
Temperatura elevada de la superficie por el calentamiento de los rodamientos

Peligro de explosin! Peligro de incendio!
ATENCIN
Comprobar regularmente los ruidos de rodadura de los rodamientos.

Comprobar regularmente el nivel de lubricante.
Desgaste en caso de funcionamiento en seco

Daos en la bomba!
ATENCIN
El grupo de bombas no se debe utilizar nunca sin llenar.

Bajo ningn concepto se debe cerrar el rgano de cierre en la tubera de
aspiracin durante el funcionamiento.
Superacin de la temperatura admisible del medio de bombeado

Daos en la bomba!
No se permite el funcionamiento contra un rgano de cierre cerrado en el lado

de impulsin.
Observar los datos de temperatura en la hoja de datos de la bomba.
Durante el funcionamiento se deben comprobar regularmente los siguientes puntos:
La bomba debe funcionar siempre de forma estable y sin vibraciones.

Comprobar los ruidos de rodadura de los rodamientos. Vibraciones, ruidos, as como un consumo de
corriente aumentado son indicios de desgaste.
Controlar los elementos elsticos del acoplamiento.
Limpiar regularmente el filtro en la tubera de aspiracin.
7.2.1
Lubricacin/vida til rodamientos
PELIGRO
Temperatura elevada de la superficie debido al sobrecalentamiento de los

rodamientos o hermetizaciones de rodamientos defectuosas
Peligro de explosin! Peligro de incendio!
Comprobar regularmente el estado del lubricante.

Comprobar regularmente el nivel de lubricante.
La lubricacin de los rodamientos se realiza generalmente con aceite mineral.

Se pueden utilizar aceites lubricantes CLP46 o 68 segn DIN 51517 o HD20W/20 con una viscosidad
cinemtica de 46-68 mm2/s a 40 C, p. ej.:
OMV lube EPX 46

Shell Morlina 46-68
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
33 de 60

Incluso con condiciones de carga desfavorables, la vida til calculatoria de los rodamientos es de ms de
25 000 horas de funcionamiento.
El primer cambio de aceite se debe realizar al cabo de 200 horas de funcionamiento. A continuacin, la
carga de aceite se tiene que renovar una vez al ao.
Soporte de
rodamiento
0/I
II
III
IV
V
Volumen de
carga [l]
0,75
1,0
1,25
2,7
3,5
NOTA
En caso de ejecucin con lubricacin por grasa, los rodamientos disponen de una
lubricacin permanente por grasa. No requieren ningn reengrase.
NOTA
Para temperaturas ambientes de < -20 C, srvase consultar a la empresa Dickow
Pumpen. Observar las indicaciones en la hoja de datos de la bomba.
7.2.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cambio de aceite
Colocar un recipiente apropiado para el aceite usado debajo del tornillo de cierre.
Desenroscar el tornillo de cierre en el soporte de coijnete y vaciar el aceite.
Despus del vaciado, volver a enroscar el tornillo de cierre.
Volver a llenar con aceite. Observar el captulo 6.1.1.
ADVERTENCIA
Fluidos lubricantes peligrosos para la salud

NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Durante el vaciado, tomar las medidas de proteccin oportunas

para las personas y el medio ambiente.
Observar las disposiciones legales con respecto a la eliminacin de
lquidos peligrosos para la salud.
34 de 60
7.3 Vaciado y eliminacin

ADVERTENCIA
Recoger y eliminar el lquido de aclarado y el eventual lquido restante.

Llevar ropa protectora y una mascarilla protectora.
Observar las disposiciones legales con respecto a la eliminacin del
lquido.
El vaciado del medio a bombear tiene lugar a travs de los tornillos de purga en la caja, un rgano de
cierre conectado o una conexin abridada.
Ver el plano de instalacin con respecto al modo de vaciado y la situacin.
7.4
Desmontaje del grupo de bombas
7.4.1
Indicaciones generales
Observar las indicaciones para la seguridad en el captulo 7.1.

Al realizar trabajos en el motor, observar la documentacin del fabricante del motor en cuestin.
En el desmontaje, observar los dibujos seccionales.
En caso de defectos, nuestro Servicio tcnico se encuentra a su disposicin.
PELIGRO
Trabajos en el grupo de bombas sin preparacin suficiente

7.4.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Desconectar correctamente el grupo de bombas.

Cerrar los rganos de cierre en el lado de aspiracin y de impulsin.
Vaciar la bomba y descargar la presin.
Cerrar las eventuales conexiones adicionales.
Dejar que el grupo de bombas se enfre hasta la temperatura
ambiente.
Desmontaje del motor
Desembornar el motor.
Retirar la proteccin del acoplamiento.
Soltar los tornillos de fijacin del motor en la placa base.
Desacoplar la bomba y el motor desplazando el motor.
ADVERTENCIA
Vuelco del motor

Aplastamiento de manos y pies!
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Asegurar el motor suspendindolo o apoyndolo.
35 de 60

NOTA
En los grupos de bombas con acoplamiento de desmontaje, el motor puede
permanecer atornillado en la placa base para el desmontaje de la unidad de
sustitucin.
7.4.3
Desmontaje de la unidad de introduccin
En la versin con acoplamiento de desmontaje, el motor permanece atornillado en la placa base. Retirar la
pieza de desmontaje segn las instrucciones de servicio del fabricante del acoplamiento.
Fig. 11: Desmontaje unidad de introduccin

1.
2.
3.
Soltar la tuerca hexagonal 920.2.

Soltar el tornillo hexagonal (1) en el pie de apoyo 183.
Con la ayuda de unos tornillos extractores, expulsar la unidad de introduccin completa (2) de la
caja en espiral 102.
4.
5.
Retirar la unidad de introduccin de la caja y depositarla.

Retirar el cubo de acoplamiento (3) del extremo del rbol.
ADVERTENCIA
Vuelco de la unidad de introduccin

7.4.4
Asegurar la unidad de introduccin suspendindola o apoyndola.
Desmontaje del rodete
Los trabajos segn el captulo 7.4.3 estn terminados.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Sujetar la unidad completa en posicin vertical en un mandril.

Soltar la tuerca del rodete 922 o el tornillo hexagonal 914.12 (Lt. 0) (rosca derecha).
Retirar el rodete del rbol de bomba.
Quitar la chaveta de ajuste 940.1.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
36 de 60

7.4.5
Desmontaje de la junta de eje

Cierre de anillo deslizante DICKOW N6 / N10 / N11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Retirar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433 del rbol de la bomba.

Quitar la tuerca hexagonal 920.1.
Expulsar la caja intermedia 113 del centraje y colocarla en el puesto de trabajo.
Quitar la tuerca hexagonal 920.5, retirar el anillo de presin 457.
Extraer el contraanillo 475 con cuidado de la caja intermedia.
Cierre de anillo deslizante DICKOW N9 / N13

1. Retirar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.1 en el lado del producto del rbol de la bomba.
2. Quitar la tuerca hexagonal 920.5.
3. Tirar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471, el anillo de presin 474 y el soporte de contraanillo
475.2 hasta el reborde del rbol.
5. Expulsar la caja intermedia 113 del centraje.
6. Retirar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.2 en el lado de la atmsfera y el casquillo distanciador 525
del rbol de la bomba.
7. Retirar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471, el anillo de presin 474 y el soporte de
contraanillo 475.2 del soporte de rodamiento.
8. Retirar el soporte de contraanillo 475.1 de la caja intermedia 113.
Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizada segn EN 12756
1. Si existe, retirar el tornillo de cabeza con hexgono interior 914.1 y expulsar el anillo base 457 de
la caja intermedia 113.
2. Retirar el casquillo protector del rbol 524 junto con la unidad de cierre de anillo deslizante
rotatoria del rbol de transmisin.
6. Quitar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471.
7. Desmontar el contraanillo 475 y el anillo trico.
Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado tndem segn EN 12756 (API-Plan 52)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Pasar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471 con el contraanillo 475.2 hasta el reborde del rbol.
Expulsar la caja intermedia 113 del centraje.
Retirar el casquillo protector del rbol 524 con el cierre de anillo deslizante 433 y el soporte de
contraanillo 476 del rbol de la bomba.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
37 de 60

6. Soltar los tornillos prisioneros en el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.2 y retirar el cierre de anillo
deslizante del casquillo protector del rbol.
7. Retirar el soporte de contraanillo 476 con el contraanillo 475.1.
8. Soltar el tornillo prisionero en el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.1 y retirar el cierre de anillo
deslizante.
9. Expulsar el contraanillo 475.1 junto con el anillo trico del soporte de contraanillo 476.
10. Retirar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471 del soporte de rodamiento.
11. Expulsar el contraanillo 475.2 junto con el anillo trico de la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante.
Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado de doble efecto segn EN 12756 (API-Plan 53)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Quitar el tornillo de cabeza con hexgono interior 914.1.

Quitar el soporte de contraanillo 476 y el contraanillo 475.
Expulsar el contraanillo 475.2 junto con el anillo trico del soporte de contraanillo 476.
Retirar el casquillo protector del rbol 524 con el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.1/2 del rbol de la
bomba.
Expulsar la caja intermedia 113 del centraje y colocarla en el puesto de trabajo.
Quitar la tuerca hexagonal 920.5 y retirar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471.
Expulsar el soporte de contraanillo 475.2 junto con el anillo trico de la caja del cierre de anillo
deslizante 471.
Cierre de anillo deslizante Cartridge

1. Si existe, retirar el tornillo de cabeza con hexgono interior 914.1 y expulsar el anillo base 457 de
la caja intermedia 113.
5. Retirar el anillo intermedio 509 del rbol de la bomba.
6. Fijar calibres de montaje en el cierre de anillo deslizante.
7. Soltar los tornillos prisioneros y retirar la unidad de cierre 433 completa del rbol de la bomba.
7.4.6
Desmontaje del rodamiento

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Soltar el tornillo prisionero 904.1 y retirar el anillo dispersor 507 del rbol de la bomba.
Soltar el tornillo hexagonal 901.2 y retirar la tapa del rodamiento 360 con la junta radial 421.2.
Expulsar el rbol de la bomba 211 junto con el rodamientos de bolas de contacto angular 325 del
asiento del soporte de rodamiento. Utilizar un husillo portabrocas o de prensa.
Soltar los tornillos de cabeza con hexgono interior 314.2 y quitar la linterna del soporte de
rodamiento 344.
Expulsar el aro exterior del rodamiento de rodillos cilndricos 322 del soporte de rodamiento 330.
Retirar la arandela de seguridad 932.2 y el disco de apoyo 550.3 del rbol de la bomba.
Retirar el rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular 325 del rbol de la bomba.
Retirar el disco de apoyo 550.3 del rbol de la bomba.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
38 de 60

Procedimiento con el soporte de rodamiento V:
1.
2.
Soltar el tornillo prisionero 904.1 y retirar el anillo dispersor 507 del rbol de la bomba.
Soltar los tornillos de cabeza con hexgono interior 914.6 y retirar la tapa del rodamiento 360.2
con la junta radial 421.1.
Soltar los tornillos de cabeza con hexgono interior 914.5 y retirar la tapa del rodamiento 360.1
con la junta radial 421.2.
Expulsar el rbol de la bomba 211 junto con el rodamientos de bolas de contacto angular 325 del
Expulsar el aro exterior del rodamiento de rodillos cilndricos 322 del soporte de rodamiento 330.
Soltar y quitar la tuerca del rbol 921.
Retirar el rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular 325 del rbol de la bomba.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
7.4.7
Cambio del rodamiento
Soporte de
rodamiento
0/I
II
III
IV
V
322
325
NU 306
NU 307
NU 409
NU 411
NU 313
2x 7306 BUA
2x 7307 BUA
2x 7311 BUA
2x 7313 BUA
2x 7314 BUA
Versin con lubricacin permanente:

Soporte de
rodamiento
0/I
II
III
IV
321
2x 6306.2RS
2x 6307.2RS
2x 6409.2RS
2x 6411.2RS
7.5
Inspeccin de componentes
7.5.1
Rodete/anillo de desgaste
Las superficies de rodadura en la zona del anillo de desgaste no deben mostrar surcos visibles. Medir los
dimetros de las superficies de rodadura. El juego total en estado nuevo es de 0,6 mm. Sustituir los anillos
de desgaste cuando el juego supera 0,9 mm.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
39 de 60

7.5.2
Soporte de rodamiento
Medir los dimetros interiores de los asientos de rodamiento de bolas. Sustituir el soporte de rodamiento
cuando se superan las siguientes medidas:
Soporte de rodamiento 0 / I
Soporte de rodamiento II
Soporte de rodamiento III
Soporte de rodamiento IV
Soporte de rodamiento V
7.5.3
max. 72,009 mm
max. 80,009 mm
max. 120,010 mm
max. 140,012 mm
max. 140,026 mm + 150,026 mm
Cierre de anillo deslizante DICKOW
Los fuelles de metal se tensan de tal modo en el estado de instalacin que mediante la fuerza de resorte se
obtiene una fuerza de cierre suficiente en las superficies deslizantes. Despus del desmontaje y una
limpieza minuciosa, medir el cierre de anillo deslizante. Sustituir el cierre de anillo deslizante cuando no
se alcancen las siguientes medidas longitudinales.
Fig. 12: Longitud cierre de anillo deslizante
Cierre de anillo deslizante

N6
N10
N11
N9
N13
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
en el lado del
producto
en el lado de la
atmsfera
en el lado del
producto
en el lado de la
atmsfera
Cdigo
A
U1
U3
U3
A
U1
U3
U3
L [mm] en soporte de rodamiento

0/I
II
III
IV
46
58
58
67
49
58
58
67
54
65
65
77
48,5
60,5
56
74
86
105
86
105
113
140
81
48,5
60,5
56
74
U2
45
53
59
79
U3
53,5
65,5
65,5
79
U2
48
58
64
82
40 de 60
7.6 Montaje del grupo de bombas

7.6.1
Indicaciones generales
Observar las indicaciones para la seguridad en el captulo 7.1.

En el montaje, observar los dibujos seccionales.
Utilizar fundamentalmente juntas planas nuevas.
Montar las juntas planas sin lubricantes.
Renunciar al uso de dispositivos auxiliares de montaje al montar juntas planas. Si es necesario,
utilizar adhesivos de contacto corrientes en el mercado. No utilizar nunca pegamentos rpidos.
Untar los puntos de ajuste, as como las uniones atornilladas con grafito o productos similares. El
lubricante debe ser compatible con el medio de bombeado.
Apretar todos los tornillos conforme a las prescripciones. Observar el captulo 7.7.
Montaje inadecuado
ATENCIN
Daos en la bomba!
Montar las bombas/el grupo de bombas conforme a las reglas vigentes en

la construccin de mquinas.
Utilizar siempre repuestos originales.
Antes del montaje se deben comprobar los siguientes puntos:
Todos los elementos desmontados han sido limpiados y examinados con respecto a su desgaste.
Los elementos defectuosos o desgastados deben ser sustituidos por repuestos originales.
Todas las superficies de hermetizacin han sido limpiadas.
7.6.2
1.
2.
3.
Montaje del rodamiento

Deslizar el disco de apoyo 550.3 sobre el rbol de la bomba.
Calentar el rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular 325 a 80-100C.
Deslizar el rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular 325 sobre el rbol de la bomba hasta el tope.
Montar rodamientos de bolas de contacto angular en disposicin en O.

Montar solamente rodamientos de bolas de contacto angular por pares de un solo
fabricante.
4.
5.
6.
Deslizar el disco de apoyo 550.3 y la arandela de seguridad 932.2 sobre el rbol de la bomba.
Presionar el aro exterior del rodamiento de rodillos cilndricos 322 dentro del soporte de
rodamiento 330.
Colocar la linterna del soporte de rodamiento 344 y fijarla con los tornillos de cabeza con
hexgono interior 914.2.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
41 de 60

7.
Presionar el rbol de la bomba 211 junto con el rodamientos de bolas de contacto angular 325 en el
Colocar la tapa de rodamiento 360 con la nueva junta radial 421.2 y apretar los tornillos
hexagonales 901.2.
Deslizar el anillo dispersor 507 sobre el rbol de la bomba. Apretar el tornillo prisionero 904.1.
8.
9.
Procedimiento con el soporte de rodamiento V:

1.
2.
Calentar el rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular 325 a 80-100C.

Deslizar el rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular 325 sobre el rbol de la bomba hasta el tope.
Tener en cuenta las indicaciones.
Enroscar la tuerca del rbol 921 y apretarla.
Presionar el aro exterior del rodamiento de rodillos cilndricos 322 dentro del soporte de
rodamiento 330.
Colocar la tapa de rodamiento 360.2 con la nueva junta radial 421.1 y apretar el tornillo de cabeza
con hexgono interior 914.6.
Presionar el rbol de la bomba 211 junto con el rodamientos de bolas de contacto angular 325 en el
Colocar la tapa de rodamiento 360.1 con la nueva junta radial 421.2 y apretar el tornillo de cabeza
con hexgono interior 914.5.
Deslizar el anillo dispersor 507 sobre el rbol de la bomba. Apretar el tornillo prisionero 904.1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
7.6.3
Montaje de la junta de eje

Durante el montaje se debe tener en cuenta fundamentalmente lo siguiente:
Tener en cuenta la designacin de la junta de eje.

Trabajar con limpieza y cuidado.
Retirar los protectores de las superficies deslizantes sin dejar residuos.
No aplicar nunca lubricante a las superficies deslizantes.
Nunca apretar a tope el fuelle metlico.
Las fuerzas axiales de montaje para colocar el fuelle metlico se deben ejercer siempre sobre el
portafuelle.
Despus de la insercin, comprobar el paralelismo ortogonal con el elemento de la caja.
La superficie del casquillo protector del rbol debe estar perfectamente limpia y lisa. El canto de
montaje est biselado.
Cierre de anillo deslizante DICKOW N6 / N10 / N11

1.
2.
3.
4.
Insertar con cuidado el contraanillo 475 en la caja intermedia.

Insertar el anillo de presin 474 y apretar con tuerca hexagonal 920.5.
Presionar la caja intermedia 113 en el centraje y apretar con tuercas hexagonales 920.1.
Deslizar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433 sobre el rbol de la bomba.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
42 de 60
Cierre de anillo deslizante DICKOW N9 / N13

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insertar el soporte de contraanillo 475.1 en la caja intermedia 113.

Deslizar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471, el anillo de presin 474 y el soporte de
contraanillo 475.2 sobre el rbol de la bomba hasta el reborde del rbol.
Deslizar sobre el rbol de la bomba el casquillo distanciador 525 y el cierre de anillo deslizante
433.2 del lado de la atmsfera.
Apretar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante con las tuercas hexagonales 920.5.
Deslizar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.1 del lado del producto sobre el rbol de la bomba.
Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado segn EN 12756

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Montar el contraanillo 475 con el anillo trico en la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471.
Atornillar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471 a la caja intermedia 113 con las tuercas
hexagonales 920.5.
Deslizar sobre el rbol de la bomba el casquillo protector del rbol 524 y la unidad de cierre de
anillo deslizante rotatoria.
En caso de que exista, presionar el anillo base 457 en la caja intermedia 113 y apretar con los
tornillos de cabeza con hexgono interior 914.1.
Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado tndem segn EN 12756 (API-Plan 52)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Montar el contraanillo 475.2 y el anillo trico en la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471.
Deslizar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471 sobre el rbol de la bomba hasta el reborde del
rbol.
Montar el contraanillo 475.1 y el anillo trico en el soporte del contraanillo 476.
Deslizar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.1 sobre el casquillo protector del rbol y apretar con el
tornillo prisionero.
Deslizar la unidad de soporte del contraanillo 476 sobre el casquillo protector del rbol.
Deslizar el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.2 sobre el casquillo protector del rbol y apretar el
tornillo prisionero.
Deslizar la unidad completa sobre el rbol de la bomba 211.
Atornillar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471 a la caja intermedia con tuercas hexagonales
920.5.
Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado de doble efecto segn EN 12756 (API-Plan 53)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Montar el soporte del contraanillo 475.1 y el anillo trico en la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante
471 y deslizarla sobre el rbol de la bomba.
Atornillar la caja del cierre de anillo deslizante 471 a la caja intermedia con tuercas hexagonales
920.5.
Deslizar el casquillo protector del rbol 524 con el cierre de anillo deslizante 433.1/2 sobre el rbol
de la bomba.
Montar el contraanillo 475.2 y el anillo trico en el soporte del contraanillo 476.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
43 de 60

6.
Atornillar a la caja intermedia 113 el soporte del contraanillo 476 con los tornillos de cabeza con
hexgono interior 914.1.
Cierre de anillo deslizante Cartridge

1.
2.
3.
Deslizar sobre el rbol de la bomba la unidad de cierre completa 433.

Atornillar a la caja intermedia 113 la unidad de cierre 433 con los tornillos de cabeza con hexgono
interior 920.5.
Apretar los tornillos prisioneros y desprender los calibres de montaje.
4.
7.6.4
1.
2.
Montaje del rodete
Pasar el rodete sobre el rbol de bomba.

Soltar la tuerca del rodete 922 o la tuerca con hexgono interior 914.12 (Lt. 0) con una llave
dinamomtrica (rosca derecha).
ATENCIN
Falta el inserto Heli-Coil

Atornilladura del rodete floja!
7.6.5
Asegurarse de que la tuerca del rodete o el rbol de bomba (Lt. 0) est

dotado del inserto Heli-Coil.
Montaje de la unidad de introduccin
ADVERTENCIA
Vuelco de la unidad de introduccin

Asegurar la unidad de introduccin suspendindola o apoyndola.
NOTA
Observar la figura 15!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Introducir la unidad de introduccin en la caja en espiral.

Utilizar una junta plana 400.5 nueva.
Apretar la tuerca hexagonal 920.2 con una llave dinamomtrica.
Montar el pie de apoyo 183 con el tornillo hexagonal 901.1 y la arandela 554.8.
Fijar el pie de apoyo con el tornillo hexagonal en la placa base.
Montar el cubo de acoplamiento en el extremo del rbol.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
44 de 60

7.6.6
Montaje del motor
NOTA
En la versin con acoplamiento de desmontaje se suprimen los dos primeros pasos.
1.
Acoplar la bomba y el motor desplazando el motor.
2.
Fijar el motor en la placa base.
3.
Alinear la bomba y el motor. Observar el captulo 5.7.
4.
Alinear el acoplamiento. Observar el captulo 5.6.
7.7 Pares de apriete de los tornillos
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
Tornillo rgido
5
9
22
45
80
195
370
Par de apriete [Nm]

8.8
A4-70
Tornillo de dilatacin Tornillo rgido Tornillo de dilatacin
4
6
16
30
55
55
40
145
135
100
280
260
195
Base de clculo:
80% de aprovechamiento del lmite elstico del material del tornillo.
Coeficiente de friccin = 0,14 ; utilizar un lubricante para tornillos para la rosca y la superficie de
aplicacin de la cabeza/tuerca.
Recomendacin: Klberpaste HEL 46-450.
Apriete con par controlado mediante una llave dinamomtrica.
NOTA
Eventuales desviaciones de los pares de apriete de los tornillos se indican en la
hoja de datos de la bomba.
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
45 de 60

Par de apriete para tornillos de cierre (independiente del material):
G 1/4 = 25 Nm
G 3/8 = 45 Nm
G 1/2 = 75 Nm
Pares de apriete para la tuerca del rodete 922 o el tornillo del rodete 914.2 y la tuerca del rbol 921
(independiente del material):
Soporte de
rodamiento
0
I
II
III
IV
V
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
922 o 914.12
Par de apriete [Nm]
Ancho de llave
30
19
100
32
120
41
140
50
140
65
140
65
921 Par de apriete [Nm]

----------160
46 de 60
8. Correccin de averas
Avera
La bomba no bombea, o bombea demasiado poco
Motor sobrecargado
Temperatura de rodamientos demasiado alta
Fuga en la bomba
Aumento de ruido y vibraciones
Aumento inadmisible de la temperatura
Elevada fuga en la junta del eje
Nmero de avera
2 3 4 5 6
Nmero
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Causa
Correccin
La bomba o la tubera no est

completamente purgada o llenada
Purgar o llenar
El rgano de cierre en la tubera de

afluencia no est completamente
abierto
Abrir el rgano de cierre
Formacin de bolsas de aire en la

tubera
Modificar la conduccin de la
tubera, montar una vlvula de
purga
Sentido de giro incorrecto
Invertir 2 fases de la alimentacin

elctrica
La contrapresin de la bomba es
superior a lo indicado
Volver a regular el punto de

trabajo, aumentar la velocidad de
giro
Montar un rodete ms grande
La viscosidad del medio de

bombeado es superior a lo indicado
Consultar al fabricante
La contrapresin de la bomba es
inferior a lo indicado
Repasar el rodete
Volver a regular el punto de
trabajo
NPSHA demasiado bajo
Controlar el nivel de lquido

Mejorar NPSHR mediante un
inducer
Reducir las resistencias en la
tubera de afluencia
Abrir completamente el rgano
de cierre en la tubera de
afluencia
Velocidad de giro incorrecta
Comprobar la velocidad de giro
Grupo de bombas mal alineado
Controlar la alineacin del

acoplamiento y realinear si es
necesario
X
X
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
47 de 60
Nmero de avera
2 3 4 5 6
Causa
Correccin
Bomba en la tubera deformada
Comprobar las conexiones de

tubera y la fijacin de la bomba
Defecto de rodamiento
Cambiar rodamiento
Desequilibrio de componentes
rotatorios, p. ej. rodete
Reequilibrar el componente en
cuestin
Tornillos de la caja y tornillos de

cierre aflojados
Apretar los tornillos

Cambiar la junta plana
No se mantiene la distancia del

acoplamiento
Corregir distancia
No existe la corriente de
refrigeracin del motor al rodamiento
Comprobar la instalacin
Instalar rodete de ventilador
Casquete prensaestopas demasiado

apretado o torcido
Modificar
Junta de eje desgastada
Cambiar la junta de eje

Controlar el lquido de aclarado y
de bloqueo
Casquillo protector del rbol estriado

o demasiado rugoso
Cambiar el casquillo protector del

rbol
Error en tubera de circulacin
Aumentar la seccin
Elastmeros daados en el cierre de

anillo deslizante
Sustituir los elastmeros
Con la presin atmosfrica, el punto

de ebullicin del medio de bombeado
se mantiene por debajo de la
temperatura de trabajo
Usar cierre de anillo deslizante

doble
Reequipar enfriamiento de vapor
Partculas slidas abrasivas
Montar emparejamiento de
anillos deslizantes resistentes al
desgaste
Modificar la forma de marcha
(Plan 31/32)
Montar el cierre de anillo
deslizante
de doble efecto (Plan 53)
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
48 de 60
9. Intercambiabilidad de piezas
9.1
Soporte de rodamiento 0
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
49 de 60
9.2 Soporte de rodamiento I
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
50 de 60
9.3 Soporte de rodamiento II
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
51 de 60
9.4 Soporte de rodamiento III
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
52 de 60
9.5 Soporte de rodamiento IV
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
53 de 60
9.6 Soporte de rodamiento V
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
54 de 60
10. Dibujos seccionales

10.1 Bomba
Fig. 13: Plano global versin estndar NCL
914.12
Fig. 14: Atornilladura del rodete soporte de rodamiento 0
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
55 de 60
Fig. 15: Versin soporte de rodamiento V
Fig. 16: Versin rodamiento con lubricacin permanente con grasa
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
56 de 60
10.2 Cierre de anillo deslizante
Fig. 17: cierre de anillo deslizante de efecto simple

DICKOW
Fig. 18: cierre de anillo deslizante tndem

DICKOW
Fig. 19: cierre de anillo deslizante de efecto simple

normalizado
Fig. 20: Cierre de anillo deslizante normalizado

tndem
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
57 de 60
Fig. 21: cierre de anillo deslizante de efecto doble

normalizado
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Fig. 22: Cierre de anillo deslizante Cartridge
58 de 60
11. Certificaciones
11. Certificaciones
11.1 Declaracin de conformidad CE
Declaracin de conformidad CE
segn la Directiva CE sobre mquinas 2006/42/CE, anexo II, n. 1A
DICKOW PUMPEN KG
Siemensstrae 22
Por la presente, declaramos que el grupo de bombas descrito en la hoja de datos de la bomba
Designacin:
Tipo:
Tamao constructivo:
Versin:
N. de serie.:
Bomba centrfuga
NCL
cumple todas las disposiciones pertinentes de la Directiva CE sobre mquinas

2006/42/CE
Se han aplicado las siguientes normas armonizadas

EN 809:1998
EN ISO 12100-1:2003
EN ISO 12100-2:2003
EN 12162:2001
EN ISO 12732-1:2008
EN ISO 12732-3:2008
EN ISO 14121-1:2007
EN ISO 20361:2009
Adems, se han aplicado las siguientes normas y especificaciones tcnicas

EN ISO 5199:2002
EN ISO 9906:1999
EN 12723:2000
EN 22858:1993
VDMA 24276:2001
Waldkraiburg, a
(Nombre, funcin)
El responsable dispone de plenos poderes para recopilar la documentacin tcnica
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
59 de 60
11. Certificaciones
11.2 Certificado de no objecin

Document of Compliance
Please fill in this statement for health innocuousness completely and attach it to the pump to
be returned to the factory.
Pump data
Type:
Serial No.: PB
Reason for shipment
Contamination of the pump

Hazardous liquids were not handled
Hazardous liquids were handled
Pumped liquid:
The pump has been
cleaned
flushed
breamed
The following safety measures must be taken before opening/repairing the pump:
Customer data
Company:
Address:
Name:
(Block Letters)
Phone:
Fax:
E-Mail:
Position:
This is to certify that the above mentioned pump has been proper cleaned/flushed/breamed
and repair can be performed without risk.
Date:
NCL ES4 04.14.doc
Signature:
60 de 60
EC Declaration of conformity of the explosion proof

as defined by EC-Explosion Proof Directive 94/9/EC, Annex X B
DICKOW PUMPEN KG
Siemensstrae 22
Herewith we declare that the pump unit, described in the pump data sheet
Type NCL
complies with the following provisions applying to EC-Explosion proof directive 94/9/EC
II 2 G cX
Product identification:
Safekeeping of technical documentation:
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt
Bundesallee 100
D-38116 Braunschweig
No. of Registration: 05 ATEX D 015
Applied harmonized European standards in particular

EN 1127-1 : 2011
EN ISO/IEC 80079-34:2011
EN 13463-1 : 2009
EN 13463-5 : 2011
Furthermore the following standards and technical Specifications have been applied
EN 12162 : 2001 + A1 : 2009
(Jrgen Konrad, Head of technical department DICKOW)
EN ISO 9906 : 2012

EN ISO 5199 : 2002
P24h6
27
Pumpe / pump
28k6
60
24
70
Motor / motor
31
130
385
DNd 1,5"
190
Wellenenden / shaft ends
490
22
440
DNs 2"
190
80
573
M12
426
P2
2x DIN 125-10,5-1.4571
DIN 939-M10-A4-70
2x DIN 934-M10-A4
140
M8 M10
740
1120
100
Erdungsanschluss
Earth connection
253
110
100
60
380
80
60
Plan53
Erdungsanschluss M10
Earth connection M10
6B
7B
180
160
Aufstellungsplan / Foundation plan
Rev.
~1236
160
Description
D
K
d1
DN
Flansche/flanges
13B
G1/4
G1
7B
Date
30.06.14
Loserth
Konrad
Signature Checked
Ablass lraum / drain oilroom;

plugged
Ablass Grundplatte/ drain baseplate
Ablass / drain; plugged
8xP19
92,1
G1/4
127
4xP22.2
73
6B
165
2"
114
Bezeichnung/designation
156
1.5"
d1
K
ASME B16.5 Class300
Flansche / flanges
Anschlsse/
connections
FLENDER ARPEX NAN

88-6/100
5G
100L2/3,6kW/B3/ExdeIICT4
Dexd N13
NCL s 32/210
PB14201782
Buss-SMS-Canzler GmbH,
Butzbach
14EBE1736
DN
Coupling:
Kupplung:
Base plate:
Rahmen:
Motor:
Design:
Ausfhrung:
Pump type:
Pumpentype:
Serial No.:
Pumpen Nr.:
Customer:
Kunde:
Item No.:
Pos. Nr.:
P.O. No.:
Best. Nr.:
Siemensstr. 22,
Postbox 1254,
Partslist
Pump type:
Design:
Sectional drawing:
NCLs 32/210
DEXD N13
54.NCL.90 / 14.NC.246/I
Buss Canzler
14EBE1736
Customer:
P.O.No.:
Item-No.:
54.VP.1
Part-N
Pcs Ident-No.
Parts name
1 14201782-M
Motor
1 00874031
Coupling guard
1 90440008
Base plate
Drawing/Stand.
Dimension/Size
04.50.1007
Material
ST
G5
GG25
1 01914755
Couplings
102
1 00741545
Volute casing 2"/1 1/2" Class300RF
01.15.288
113
1 00148226
Intermediate casing
02.23.1730
183
1 00690332
Support foot
03.60.229
211
1 00252671
Pump shaft
03.26.919
233
1 00011904
Impeller
02.12.338
12.129
1.4408
322
1 01016709
Cylindrical roller bearing
DIN 5412
NU306.TVP2
ST
325
2 01003379
Angular ball bearing
DIN 628
7306BUA
ST
330
1 00125349
Bearing bracket
01.18.88
18.88
GG 25
344
1 00231261
Bearing bracket lantern
02.24.38
24.38
GG 25
360
1 00577074
Bearing cover
04.35.297
35.68
GG 25
400.01
1 00598752
Gasket
04.39.292
VULKOLAN
400.02
1 00597927
Gasket
04.39.155
0,3
NOVATEC PREMIUM
400.05
1 00608621
Gasket
04.39.251
213*220*1,5
SIGRAFLEX HD-PRO
400.06
1 00597920
Gasket
04.39.154
22*32*1,5
GRAFIT/TITAN TGG
400.07
1 00598004
Gasket
04.39.168
22*32*1,5
GRAFIT/TITAN TGG
400.10
1 00599357
Gasket
04.39.396
53*60*0,5
GRAFIT/TITAN TGG
400.11
1 00598904
Gasket
04.39.318
51*58*0,5
GRAFIT/TITAN TGG
400.12
1 00599231
Gasket
04.39.375
48*54*0,5
GRAFIT/TITAN TGG
400.13
1 00599208
Gasket
04.39.371
22*25*0,3
NOVATEC PREMIUM
411.01
1 00599837
Joint ring
04.39.467
14*18,8*2
KUPFER
411.02
1 01907836
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 14*18*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.15
2 01907841
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 17*23*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.16
2 01907841
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 17*23*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.17
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.18
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.19
2 01911498
Joint ring
EN 837-1
G1/2
PTFE
411.20
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.21
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.22
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.23
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.25
1 01907856
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 33*39*2
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.26
1 01907846
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 21*26*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
411.27
1 01907851
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 27*32*2
NOVATEC PREMIUM
411.28
2 01907831
Joint ring
DIN 7603
A 10*13,5*1,5
TOP-CHEM 2000
Date
Rev.
1 handled by
approved
NAN 88-6/100
Signature
08.09.14
08.09.14
SCHARF
KONRAD
15.288
GGG 40.3
S355J2+N
60.229
GG 25
1.4021+QT 800
partslist
Side
PB14201782
Siemensstr. 22,
Postbox 1254,
Partslist
Part-N
Pcs Ident-No.
Parts name
412.24
1 01904614
O-ring
421.01
1 01016376
Shaft seal
421.02
1 01016376
Shaft seal
433.01
1 00654047
Mechanical seal
14.N25.354
1.4571/SIC/NOPR
433.02
1 00654055
Mechanical seal
14.N25.355
1.4571/SIC/NOPR
471
1 00027157
Mechanical seal casing
03.16.523
S355J2
474
1 00482931
Pressure ring
04.32.994
S355J2
475.01
1 00465508
Seal ring
04.30.439
1.4462/SIC/NOPR
475.02
1 00465212
Seal ring
04.30.402
507
1 00476086
Deflector
04.32.309
512.01
1 00610331
Wear ring
04.40.48
1.4571
512.02
1 00610331
Wear ring
04.40.48
1.4571
525
1 00362631
Distance sleeve
04.27.826
1.4571
550.01
1 01013110
Support disc
DIN 988
SS30*42*2,5
FST
550.02
1 01013124
Support disc
DIN 988
SS56*72*3
FST
550.03
2 01013110
Support disc
DIN 988
SS30*42*2,5
FST
554.01
8 01000739
Disc
DIN 125
A13
ST
554.03
2 01000736
Disc
DIN 125
A10,5
ST
554.16
4 01000740
Disc
DIN 125
A13
A4
591
1 00620262
Thermosiphon vessel
00.46.66
638
1 01900534
Constant level oiler with protection cage
ACL 7596 NPT 1/4" ST-VERZINKT/GLAS
655
1 01989802
Handpump
PFH-L/6
691
1 01989268
Manometer 233.30 + alarm sensor 831.1
100MM / 0-25BAR / G1/2

1.4571
692
1 01989502
Bimetal Thermometer
0-160 C, G1/2
695.01
1 01986251
Level switch typ 60-ARV
710.01
1 01036277
Pipe
EN 10305-4
12*1,5*500
1.4571
710.02
2 01036282
Pipe
EN 10305-4
12*1,5*1000
1.4571
710.03
1 01036007
Pipe
EN 10305-4
6*1*1000
1.4571
731.15
2 01914009
Screwing
SS-12MO-1-6 RS
1.4401
731.16
2 01914009
Screwing
SS-12MO-1-6 RS
1.4401
731.23
1 01914037
Screwing
SS-12MO-1-8 RS
1.4401
731.28
2 01914102
Screwing
SS-6MO-1-2 RS
1.4401
731.34
2 01914122
Screwing
SS-12MO-1-4
1.4401
732
1 00619127
Fastener
741.01
1 01986028
Ball valve
741.02
1 01905467
Pressure Gauge Valve
742
1 01905469
Non-return valve
901.01
2 01010038
Hexagon head bolt
DIN 933
901.02
4 01009816
Hexagon head bolt
901.16
2 01010153
Hexagon head bolt
902.01
8 01011329
902.02
8 01011341
902.04
2 01011257
1 handled by
approved
Dimension/Size
Material
63*2
FKM 80
DIN 3760
A30*40*7
VITON
DIN 3760
A30*40*7
VITON
1.4462/SIC/NOPR
32.309
1.4408
1.4571
1.4571
1.4571
2"-VS-L260/12-V52A-EX
1.4571
03.45.31
ST
2*NPT1/4" INNEN
1.4408
G1/2
1.4571
RHD 6-L
1.4571
M10*25
8.8
DIN 933
M6*10
8.8
DIN 933
M12*40
A4-70
Stud
DIN 939
M12*30
8.8
Stud
DIN 939
M12*45
8.8
Stud
DIN 939
M10*65
8.8
Date
Rev.
Drawing/Stand.
DIN 16270
Signature
08.09.14
08.09.14
SCHARF
KONRAD
partslist
Side
PB14201782
Siemensstr. 22,
Postbox 1254,
Partslist
Part-N
Pcs Ident-No.
Parts name
Drawing/Stand.
Dimension/Size
Material
903.01
1 01003427
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G1/4
ST
903.04
1 01003427
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G1/4
ST
903.17
1 01003436
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G1/2
A4
903.20
1 01003436
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G1/2
A4
903.21
1 01003436
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G1/2
A4
903.26
1 01003436
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G1/2
A4
903.27
1 01003440
Screwed plug
DIN 910
G3/4
A4
904.01
1 01006650
Grub screw
DIN 915
M5*8
A4
904.02
2 01006646
Grub screw
DIN 915
M5*6
A4
904.03
2 01006646
Grub screw
DIN 915
M5*6
A4
913
1 00452734
Vent plug
04.29.92
914.02
3 01017506
Inner hexagon cap screw
DIN 6912
M10*20
8.8
920.01
8 01001877
Hexagon nut
DIN 934
M12
920.02
8 01001877
Hexagon nut
DIN 934
M12
920.05
2 01001872
Hexagon nut
DIN 934
M10
920.16
2 01010981
Hexagon nut
DIN 934
M12
A4
922
1 00442512
Impeller nut
04.28.57
932.01
2 01013057
Circlip
DIN 984
J72*2,5K
FST
932.02
1 01001109
Circlip
DIN 471
A30*1,5
FST
932.04
1 01012997
Circlip
DIN 983
A30*1,5K
FST
940.01
1 00690119
Key
04.60.96
940.02
1 01022549
Key
DIN 6885
Date
Rev.
1 handled by
approved
Signature
08.09.14
08.09.14
SCHARF
KONRAD
ST
C45+C
1.4571
A8*7*36
1.4571
partslist
Side
PB14201782
Spriralgehusepumpe einflutig / Volute casing pump end suction
Baugre / Size 32/210

Drehzahl / Speed n = 1750 1/min
[m]
24,5
24
Frderhhe / Head
210
23,5
23
20%
30%
22,5
22
21,5
21
200
35%
38%
40%
20,5
20
19,5
42%
19
18,5
Eff.
43%
18
17,5
180
17
16,5
16
15,5
15
14,5
14
160
13,5
13
12,5
12
140
11,5
11
10,5
10
9,5
38%
9
8,5
8
7,5
7
6,5
[kW]
1,7
Wellenleistung /Shaft power P2
1,6
210
1,5
1,4
200
1,3
1,2
1,1
1
180
0,9
0,8
160
0,7
0,6
140
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
[m]
1,55 NPSH-Werte/values
1,5
1,45
1,4
1,35
1,3
1,25
1,2
1,15
1,1
1,05
1
0,95
0,9
0,85
0,8
0,75
0,7
0,65
0,6
0,55
0
0,5
1,5
2,5
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
7,5
8,5
9,5 10 10,5 11 11,5 12 12,5 13 13,5 14 14,5 15 15,5 16 16,5 [m/h]
Dichte / density = 1 kg/dm

kin. Zhigkeit / kin. v iscosity = 1 mm/s
Bei Magnetpumpen Kupplungsv erlustleistung addieren / f or magnetic pumps add. magnetic losses
64.NC.202
Stand / Issue: 22.10.2009
Operating- and Maintenance Instructions for

Shaft Sealing for DICKOW-Chemical Standard Pumps, Series NC
14.NC.246e
page 1/4
Double Metal Bellows Mechanical Seal

Brand DICKOW - Standard design "N13"
1. SECTIONAL DRAWING and PARTS LIST

$3,3ODQ
IUDPHVL]H,9IUDPHVL]H,,,
VWHDPLQOHW
6WHDPLQOHWDQGRXWOHWDYDLODEOHDW
MDFNHWHGSXPSVRQO\

,QWHUPHGLDWHFDVLQJ
*DVNHW
*DVNHW
*DVNHW
*DVNHW
2ULQJ
0HFKDQLFDOVHDO
0HFKDQLFDOVHDO
6HDOHQGSODWH
3UHVVXUHULQJ
5RWDWLQJVHDOULQJ
6WDWLRQDU\VHDOULQJ
'LVWDQFHVOHHYH
:DVKHU
6WXG
6WXG
*UXEVFUHZ
+H[DJRQQXW
+H[DJRQQXW

VWHDPRXWOHW

GLPHQVLRQV
LQPP

IUDPHVL]H

,
,,
G

/

/

XSWR3%G /
/ XSWRVKDIWHQG
,,,

,9

',&.2:3803(1.*
6HDOIDFHV
SURGXFWVLGH
DWPRVSKHUHVLGH

88;**
88;**
Issue 11/09
(Rev. 2)

14.NC.246e
page 2/4
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2SHUDWLQJ
3URGXFWVLGHGHDGHQGQRFLUFXODWLRQ3UHVVXUL]DWLRQE\$3,SODQ
2SHUDWLQJOLPLWV
6HDOSUHVVXUHEDUWHPSHUDWXUHPD[&.
3. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
0HFKDQLFDOVHDOVVKRXOGQRWVKRZYLVLEOHOHDNDJHGXULQJRSHUDWLRQWKH\VKRXOGEHGULSWLJKW/LTXLGOHYHODQGVHDOLQJSUHVVXUHLQ
WKHYHVVHOPXVWEHFKHFNHGSHULRGLFDOO\

7KHVHDOIDFHVDUHVXEMHFWWRQDWXUDOZHDU:HDUGHSHQGVYHU\PXFKRQWKHSURSHUWLHVRIWKHSXPSHGOLTXLGOXEULFDWLRQFRQWD
PLQDWLRQ7KXVDQ\IRUHFDVWUHJDUGLQJDYDLODELOLW\LVGLIILFXOW:HUHFRPPHQGWRLQVSHFWWKHVHDOIDFHVDIWHURSHUDWLQJKRXUV
4. TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.1

6\PSWRP
5HFRPPHQG

6\PSWRP
3UREOHP
5HPHG\

4.2

3UREOHP
5HPHG\
Mechanical seal is leaking after start-up

0LQRUOHDNDJHGXULQJVWDUWXSWHPSHUDWXUHDWVHDOHQGSODWHLVQRUPDO
.HHSSXPSUXQQLQJVHDOOHDNDJHVKRXOGVWRSDIWHUDFHUWDLQWLPHRIRSHUDWLRQ

/HDNDJHWKURXJKHOHYDWHGWHPSHUDWXUHDWVHDOHQGSODWH
([FHVVLYHWHPSHUDWXUHDWVHDOHQGSODWHLVFDXVHGE\KLJKIULFWLRQEHWZHHQWKHVHDOIDFHV
'LVDVVHPEOHPHFKDQLFDOVHDOFKHFNVHDOIDFHVUHZRUNRUUHSODFHLIQHFHVVDU\,IVROLGVDUHIRXQGSXPSDQGSODQW
PXVWWKRURXJKO\EHIOXVKHG

Pressure- and Level drop in the vessel

$OOPHFKDQLFDOVHDOVKDYHDFHUWDLQOHDNDJHUDWHZKLFKLQFUHDVHVQDWXUDOO\GXULQJWLPHRIRSHUDWLRQ7KLV
FRQVHTXHQWO\FDXVHVSUHVVXUHDQGOHYHOGURSLQWKHYHVVHO
&RUUHFWSUHVVXUHDQGOHYHOLQWKHWKHUPRVLSKRQYHVVHODQGNHHSPRQLWRULQJ
5. DISASSEMBLY

5HPRYHLPSHOOHUDFFRUGLQJWRWKHRSHUDWLQJPDQXDORIWKHSXPS
5HPRYHPHFKDQLFDOVHDOE\XVLQJDSXOOHU
/RRVHQDQGUHPRYHKH[DJRQQXW
3XVKWKHVHDOHQGSODWHSUHVVXUHULQJDQGVHDOULQJRQWRWKHVKDIWVWHS
/RRVHQDQGUHPRYHKH[DJRQQXWV
3UHVVWKHLQWHUPHGLDWHFDVLQJRXWRIILWVFHQWULQJDQGSXOOLWRIIZLWKWKHVHDOULQJ
/RRVHQDQGUHPRYHWKHJUXEVFUHZV
5HPRYHPHFKDQLFDOVHDODQGGLVWDQFHVOHHYHE\XVLQJDSXOOHU
5HPRYHVHDOHQGSODWHVHDOULQJVXSSRUWDQGWKHSUHVVXUHULQJIURPEHDULQJEUDFNHWODQWHUQ
6. INSPECTION
0HWDOOLFVHDOSDUWVPXVWEHIUHHRIFRUURVLRQRUDQ\PHFKDQLFDOGDPDJHV&KDQJHVHDOIDFHVDOZD\VLQSDLUVLIFKHPLFDODWWDFNRU
JURRYHVDUHYLVLEOHRQWKHIDFHV5HSODFHPHQWRIHODVWRPHUHVDQGJDVNHWVLVJHQHUDOO\UHFRPPHQGHGLQWKHFRXUVHRILQVSHFWLRQ
1&H5HY

14.NC.246e
page 3/4
$WDVVHPEOLQJFRQGLWLRQWKHPHWDOEHOORZVDUHWHQVLRQHGVRIDUWKDWWKHVSULQJFRQVWDQWRIWKHEHOORZVHQVXUHVDVXIILFLHQWFORVLQJ
IRUFHRQWKHVHDOIDFHV,QDGPLVVLEOHSODQWFRQGLWLRQHGSUHVVXUHLQWKHV\VWHPPRVWO\FDXVHGE\ZDWHUKDPPHUFDQGHIRUPWKH
EHOORZVLQDZD\WKDWWKHUHTXLUHGFORVLQJIRUFHLVQRWDYDLODEOHDQ\PRUH:HDURQWKHVHDOIDFHVDOVRFDQUHGXFHWKHPRXQWLQJ
OHQJWK$IWHUDWKRURXJKFOHDQLQJWKHVHDOVPXVWEHPHDVXUHGDQGUHSODFHGLIWKHPHDVXUHGOHQJWKVDUHEHORZWKHIROORZLQJYDOXHV

SURGXFWVLGH

DWPRVSKHULFVLGH

)UDPHVL]H
/PLQ
/PLQ

,

,,

,,,

,9

7. REASSEMBLY

5HDVVHPEO\LVWREHSHUIRUPHGLQUHYHUVHGRUGHU7KHIROORZLQJPXVWEHFRQVLGHUHG
&OHDQOLQHVVDQGDFFXUDF\LVDPXVW
5HPRYHIDFHSURWHFWLRQUHVLGXHIUHH
'RQRWOXEULFDWHVXUIDFHVWKH\PXVWEHGU\DQGGXVWIUHH
1HYHUFRPSUHVVPHWDOEHOORZVFRPSOHWHO\
'RQRWVWUHVVPHWDOEHOORZVGXULQJPRXQWLQJRQVKDIW
8. SUITABILITY IN HAZARDOUS AREAS, ACC. TO EC-DIRECTIVE 94/9/EG

7KH',&.2:0HWDOEHOORZVPHFKDQLFDOVHDO1DFFWR1&LVGHWHUPLQHGIRUDSSOLFDWLRQLQSXPSVRIJURXS,,
FDWHJRU\*7;7KHIROORZLQJPXVWEHFRQVLGHUHG
'U\5XQQLQJ

7KHGHILQHGXVHRIWKHPHFKDQLFDOVHDOLVFRQGLWLRQHGRQDVWDEOHOLTXLGILOPEHWZHHQWKHVHDOIDFHV'U\UXQRIWKHVHDO
ZLOOFDXVHH[FHVVLYHWHPSHUDWXUHULVHDQGGDPDJHWRWKHVHDOIDFHV7KHVHXSVHWFRQGLWLRQVPXVWEHDYRLGHGXQGHUDOO
FLUFXPVWDQFHV,WLVDEVROXWHO\QHFHVVDU\WKDWSXPSVHDOFKDPEHUDQGWKHUPRV\SKRQYHVVHOLVFRPSOHWHO\ILOOHG,IWKLV
FDQQRWEHHQVXUHGE\WKHXVHUVXLWDEOHPRQLWRULQJGHYLFHVPXVWEHSURYLGHG

,QRUGHUWRDYRLGGU\UXQQLQJRIWKHDWPRVSKHULFVHDOWKHWKHUPRV\SKRQYHVVHOPXVWEHHTXLSSHGLQJHQHUDOZLWKDOLTXLGOHYHO
FRQWUROOHU$GGLWLRQDOWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJLVUHFRPPHQGHG
7HPSHUDWXUHOLPLWV

7KHRSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHDWWKHVHDOIDFHVDWDWPRVSKHULFVHDO
PXVWEHEHORZWKHPD[LPXPDOORZDEOHVXUIDFHWHPSHUDWXUHDV
VKRZQLQWKHIROORZLQJWDEOH
0D[RSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHPHFKDQLFDOVHDO
7\SH1 &
7HPSHUDWXUH
FODVV
7
7
7
7
7
7

0D[DOORZDEOH
VXUIDFHWHPSHUDWXUH

&
&
&
&
&
&
1&H5HY

14.NC.246e
page 4/4
7RGHWHUPLQHWKHH[SHFWHGRSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHVXSSO\IOXLGUHVSHFWLYHO\WKHWHPSHUDWXUHULVHDWWKHVOLGLQJIDFHVRIWKH
DWPRVSKHULFVHDOWKHVHDOIDFHVDVZHOODVWKHSK\VLFDOSURSHUWLHVRIWKHVXSSO\IOXLGYLVFRVLW\VSHFLILFKHDWPXVWEHFRQVLGHUHG
7KHH[SHFWHGWHPSHUDWXUHULVHDWWKHVOLGLQJIDFHVRIWKHDWPRVSKHULFVHDOLVEDVHGRQDQDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHRI&DQG
FRQGLWLRQHGRQWKHGLVVLSDWLRQRIWKHIULFWLRQKHDWWKURXJKWKHWKHUPRV\SKRQYHVVHO,IQHFHVVDU\WKHWKHUPRV\SKRQYHVVHOVKRXOG
EHHTXLSSHGZLWKDQDGGLWLRQDOFRROLQJORRS
7KHVXSSO\IOXLGVDUHFODVVLILHGLQWKUHHJURXSVXQGHUFRQVLGHUDWLRQRIYLVFRVLW\DQGVSHFLILFKHDW

0HGLXPFODVV :DWHUDQGUHVVHPEOLQJZDWHUHJGULQNLQJZDWHUVHUYLFHZDWHU
0HGLXPFODVV /LJKWK\GURFDUERQVHJ;\ORO0HWKDQRO3URSDQ%XWDQ%HQ]ROH.HURVHQ
0HGLXPFODVV +HDY\K\GURFDUERQVHJ0HWK\OHQHFKORULGH7KHUPDORLO

6SHHG
&ODVV
&ODVV
&ODVV
([SHFWHG7YDOXHV.
PLQ
PLQ
)DFWRUVIRUVHOHFWLQJWKHVHDOIDFHV
6HDOIDFHV
6L&6L&

$EEUHYLDWLRQ
88

)DFWRU

([DPSOHV

'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHH[SHFWHGVHDOULQJWHPSHUDWXUH7*/RIDWPRVSKHULFVHDO
*LYHQ7HPSHUDWXUHVHDOLQJSUHVVXUHIOXLG7&0HGLXP&ODVVQ PLQ6HDOIDFHV886L&6L&

7HPSHUDWXUHVHDOLQJSUHVVXUHIOXLG

&
5HVXOW
7&ODVVPLQ
)DFWRUVHDOIDFHV88
7H[SHFWHG
([SHFWHGVHDOULQJWHPSHUDWXUH7*/
6XLWDEOHIRUWHPSHUDWXUHFODVVHV
.

&

&

7777
7HPSHUDWXUHFODVV7
7&ODVVPLQ
)DFWRUVHDOIDFHV88
7H[SHFWHG
6DIHW\IDFWRU
$OORZDEOHZRUNLQJWHPSHUDWXUH7]XO

.

'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHDOORZDEOHZRUNLQJWHPSHUDWXUH7]XORIVHDOLQJSUHVVXUHIOXLG
*LYHQ7HPSHUDWXUHFODVV70HGLXPFODVVQ PLQ6HDOIDFHV88
5HVXOW
&

&
&
&

:KHQGHWHUPLQLQJWKHDOORZDEOHWHPSHUDWXUHRIVHDOLQJSUHVVXUHIOXLGDWDFHUWDLQWHPSHUDWXUHFODVV7WKHVWDQGDUG
(1UHTXLUHVWRFRQVLGHUDVDIHW\UHGXFWLRQRI&IRUWKH7FODVVHV77DQGRI&IRUWKH
7FODVVHV77
Attention !

7KHXVHURIWKHSXPSPXVWJXDUDQWHHWRPDLQWDLQWKHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHVHDOLQJSUHVVXUHIOXLG,ILWLVXQDEOH
WRGRVRUHOLDEOHPHDVXUHPHQWVPXVWEHWDNHQWRDYRLGH[FHVVLYHWHPSHUDWXUHULVHLQDQ\FDVH,IUHTXLUHGWKH
WKHUPRVLSKRQYHVVHOPXVWEHHTXLSSHGZLWKDQDGGLWLRQDOFRROLQJORRS
1&H5HY
Operation / Installation Instructions

Thermosiphon Vessel
No. 44.TSB.E3.11/13
Original Manual
DICKOW PUMPEN KG
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1. General................................................................................................................................................. 3
2. Safety ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Designation of Warning Notices .................................................................................................. 4
2.2 Intended use.................................................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Avoidance of foreseeable operating errors ................................................................................... 5
2.4 Qualification of personnel ............................................................................................................ 5
2.5 Additional safety regulations........................................................................................................ 5
2.6 Safety instructions for the operator / user..................................................................................... 6
2.7 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and assembly .................................................... 6
2.8 Non-observance of the instruction manual ................................................................................... 6
3. Description........................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 General description....................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Construction ................................................................................................................................. 7
3.3 Design Data .................................................................................................................................. 8
3.4 Identification ................................................................................................................................ 8
3.5 Scope of supply ............................................................................................................................ 8
3.6 Dimensions and Weights .............................................................................................................10
4. Handling / Storage / Disposal .............................................................................................................11
4.1 Handling ......................................................................................................................................11
4.2 Storage / Preservation ..................................................................................................................11
4.3 Return shipment ..........................................................................................................................11
4.4 Disposal .......................................................................................................................................12
5. Installation ..........................................................................................................................................13
6. Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................15
6.1Barrier fluid .................................................................................................................................15
6.2 Mechanical seal in Tandem arrangement ....................................................................................16
6.3 Double mechanical seal ...............................................................................................................17
7. Maintenance / Servicing / Inspection .................................................................................................18
7.1 Safety regulations ........................................................................................................................18
7.2 Operating surveillance .................................................................................................................18
8. Hazard analysis ...................................................................................................................................19
8.1 Pressure .......................................................................................................................................19
8.2 Temperature.................................................................................................................................19
8.3 Corrosion .....................................................................................................................................19
8.4 Protective measures .....................................................................................................................20
9. Documentation....................................................................................................................................21
10.Data sheet / Certificate........................................................................................................................22
10.1 Data sheet Thermosiphon Vessel ................................................................................................22
10.2 Type- and Pressure Test Certificate ............................................................................................23
10.3 Declaration of Conformity ..........................................................................................................24
TSB E3 11.13
2 of 24
1. General
1. General
This instruction manual describes the proper and safe usage of the thermosiphon vessel during all
operating phases.
The instruction manual does not consider local regulations. Adherence to those is the responsibility of the
owner.
The name tag states the most important operating data as well as the serial number. The serial number is a
precise description of the system and serves as identification for all following procedures.
In the event of damage the Customer Service of Dickow Pumpen must immediately be informed in order
to maintain guarantee claims.
Applicable documents:
-
Data sheet
Dimensional drawing
Piping plan
Parts list
Sub-supplier documentation
TSB E3 11.13
3 of 24
2. Safety
2. Safety
The manual includes basic instructions for installation, operation and maintenance. Only if these
instructions are strictly observed, a safe handling of the thermosiphon system is guaranteed and personal
injury and material damage is avoided.
All the safety instructions in this manual must be considered.
This manual must be thoroughly reviewed and completely understood by the qualified personnel /
operator before attempting assembly and start-up.
The manual must consistently be available on site.
Indications and plates attached to the thermosiphon vessel must be followed and kept in legible condition.
2.1
Designation of Warning Notices
Signal word
Explanation
DANGER
signifies an imminent danger.

If it will not be avoided, death or severe injury are the consequence.
WARNING

If it will not be avoided, death or severe injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION

If it will not be avoided, slight or minor injury may be the consequence.
ATTENTION
Symbol
signifies a possibly harmful situation.

If it will not be avoided, danger for the thermosiphon vessel and its function may
be the consequence.
Explanation
General danger sign
Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with death or
injury.
Dangerous voltage
Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with voltage.
Hot surface
Together with a signal word, it signifies dangers in connection with hot surfaces.
TSB E3 11.13
4 of 24
2. Safety
Gives information on protection from explosion development in hazardous area
according to EC-Directive 94/9/EG.
System breakdown
Together with the signal word ATTENTION, it signifies dangers for the
thermosiphon vessel and its function.
Notice
Provides recommendation and useful information for handling the product.
2.2
Intended use
The thermosiphon system may only be used for the specified application Any other or additional use
does not constitute intended use.
Operation under conditions beyond the design date is not allowed.
2.3
Avoidance of foreseeable operating errors
Never exceed the allowable application limits regarding pressure and temperature which are specified
in the data sheet.
Consider and adhere to all safety instructions and other notices mentioned in the operating
manual.
Unauthorized rebuilding and alterations of the thermosiphon system are not permitted.
2.4
Qualification of personnel
The personnel must possess the relevant qualification for assembly, operation, maintenance and
inspection of the thermosiphon system.
Responsibility, competence and supervision must be strictly regulated by the owner.
Skill of the personnel shall be improved by training. Training course can be held by the technical staff of
Dickow Pumpen.
2.5
Additional safety regulations
Besides the safety instructions mentioned in this manual, the following additional regulations apply:
Accident prevention regulations

Explosion proof regulations
Safety regulations for handling hazardous materials
Applicable standards and laws
TSB E3 11.13
5 of 24
2. Safety
2.6
Protection against contact with hot and cold components must be provided by customer
Equipment must always be earthed / grounded.
Protectiv equipment for personnel must be provided and used.
Toxic liquid leakage must be drained off safely, without endangering individuals and environment.
Legal requirements must be observed.
Danger through electric energy must be excluded.
Hydrogen must not be used as process fluid.
2.7
Safety instructions for the operator / user
Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and

assembly
Only original parts or parts approved by Dickow shall be used.

Repairs on the thermosiphon system may only be done during shutdown.
The vessel must have cooled down to ambient temperature.
The vessel must be depressurized and drained.
Works on the thermosiphon system may only be done with disconnected electricity.
2.8
Non-observance of the instruction manual
Non-observance of this manual leads to loss of warranty and damage claims. Non-observance will
involve the following risks:
Endangering of individuals through electrical, thermal, mechanical and chemical impacts.

Danger through explosions.
Danger through breakdown of essential functions.
Endangering of environment through leakage of toxic liquids.
TSB E3 11.13
6 of 24
3. Description
3. Description
3.1
General description
Thermosiphon vessels are used for supplying barrier fluid to double and tandem seal arrangements. They
are used for cooling and act as fluid reservoir. The fluid exchange is effected either through natural
circulation or forced circulation.
Natural circulation
The circulation will adjust itself according to the thermosiphon principle. This means, the heated, specific
lighter liquid rises from the sealing chamber through the piping into the thermosiphon vessel, will cool
down there and sink as the specific heavier liquid back to the sealing chamber.
Forced circulation
In case the natural circulation is insufficient, it can be supported by several circulation devices. This can
be done by a pumping thread or a pumping ring on seal side. If no satisfactorily performance is obtained
therewith, a circulation pump must be integrated into the circuit.
A thermosiphon system is not working independently, but is intended to be assembled with a machine.
According to the Pressure Vessel Guideline 97/23/EU, the thermosiphon vessel is suitable for hazardous
liquids of group 1 and is subject to the Conformity Valuation Procedure of category II. The modules B1
(EU-design test) and C1 (conformity of construction) are chosen.
3.2
Construction
The thermosiphon vessel in standard configuration is provided with all connections and fittings. In order
to increase the cooling effect, an internal cooling coil can be connected.
A large threaded plug in the vessel cover allows easy cleaning of the inside.
The different liquid levels are shown in the drawing.
NLL
LLL
HLL
TSB E3 11.13
=
=
=
Normal filling level

Minimum filling level
Maximum allowable filling level
7 of 24
3. Description
3.3
Design Data
Vessel volume
Max. allowable operating pressure
Max. allowable operating temperature
Min. allowable operating temperature
Test overpressure (20C)
Working volume MAX - MIN
Cooling capacity Natural circulation 1)
Cooling capacity Forced circulation 1)
Required cooling water quantity
3.4
Vessel
Cooling coil
8 litre
0,37 litre
25 bar
40 bar
200C
200C
-60C
-10C
43 bar
60 bar
ca. 1,6 litre
ca. 1,5 kW
ca. 4 kW
ca. 0,4 m3/h
1)
Guide value at barrier

fluid :
Water/60C
Cooling water/20C
Identification
Each thermosiphon vessel is provided with a name tag. The name tag indicates the design data, the serial
number, as well as the CE-marking with the identification number of the named authority (CE 0036).
3.5
Scope of supply
Depending on the design of the thermosiphon system, different monitoring devices and auxiliaries can be
connected.
TSB E3 11.13
8 of 24
3. Description
3.5.1
Gauges
For monitoring of the vessel pressure, a gauge (NG100) with a display range of 0-10 or 0-25 bar can be
used. Material: brass/fibre glass respectively 1.4571.
For constant monitoring, a tube-spring manometer (NG100) according to EN 837-1 with a measuring
range of 0-25 bar, material 1.4571, can be installed together with an inductive limit signal sensor. Details
about safety, installation and wiring are stated in the corresponding operating manual. The pressure
gauges with thread G shall be connected to the upside connection 2.
3.5.2
Thermometer
For monitoring of the operating temperature, a bimetal dial thermometer with connection at the rear and a
thermowell of 1.4571 can be used.
The thermometer with thermowell and thread G shall be connected to the downside connection 5.
3.5.3
Level switch
For constant monitoring of the filling level, a magnetic float switch with reed contact can be used.
Switching operation is performed contactless, wearfree and without auxiliary power.
L1
L2
= LSH = 140 mm =>

= LSL = 210 mm =>
upper switchpoint at rising liquid level

lower switchpoint at falling liquid level
Details about safety, installation and wiring are stated in the corresponding operating manual.
The level switch shall be screwed into the G2-thread
(connection 7) on top of the thermosiphon vessel.
As far as requirements on the functional safety up to SIL 2 acc. to
IEC 61508 / IEC 61511-1 must be met, a vibration limit switch
(Liquiphant) including a filling level evaluator should be applied
instead of a magnetic float switch.
TSB E3 11.13
9 of 24
3. Description
3.5.4
Optoelectronic limit indicator with switching amplifier
For monitoring the filling level in critical service conditions, an optoelectronic limit indicator can limit
the maximum filling level.
The switching amplifier included in scope of supply, must be installed in a safe area and operated
together with the limit indicator.
The limit indicator is to be screwed with the thread G directly into the thermosiphon vessel (connection
10).
3.5.5
Refill unit
Manual refilling during operation in case of barrier fluid loss is possible with a refill unit. This consists of
a reservoir (volume approx. 1 litre) with filler plug and a handpump. The refill unit is mounted near the
thermosiphon vessel.
Pumping capacity is approx. 3,2 cm3/stroke. Discharge pressure depends on the manual force and is
approx. 10 bar. A pressure relief valve is not included.
The refill unit is protected by a check valve between vessel and unit.
The refill unit is not suitable for building up an appropriate barrier pressure for double mechanical seals.
3.5.6
Diaphragm accumulator
For pressurization of double mechanical seals a diaphragm accumulator can be used. This device is
delivered ready for operation. The filling pressure (po) is indicated on the accumulator casing. Prior to
start-up the notes in chapter 6.3 must be observed.
The diaphragm accumulator with connection thread G shall be mounted to the upside connection 11.
When a diaphragm accumulator is used, a refill unit and a pressure gauge with limit switch is additionally
required.
3.6
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions and weights can be taken from the foundation plan / dimensional drawing.
TSB E3 11.13
10 of 24

4.1
Handling
Use only suitable lifting devices for handling, e.g. hemp rope or coil loops. Do not use any chains or
steel ropes.
Systems mounted to the machine must be lifted in vertical position only.
Protect the thermosiphon system against vibrations.
Handling of gas-filled diaphragm accumulators must be carried out with reasonable care and caution
and in compliance with all safeety regulations.
WARNING
Damage of the diaphragm accumulator

Danger to life through bursting of the accumulator!
4.2
Do not operate with damaged bladder accumulators.
Storage / Preservation
Storage for some weeks or months needs to be on a dry place in a shed, protected against weather and
dust. The thermosiphon system must also here be covered to be protected against dust.
4.3
Return shipment
Drain the vessel properly..

Always attach a document of compliance completely filled in..
NOTE
If required, a Document of Compliance can be downloaded under

www.dickow.de
TSB E3 11.13
11 of 24
4.4
Disposal
WARNING

Danger for individuals and environment!
Collect and dispose rinsing water.

Wear protective clothing and face mask.
Consider the legal regulations for disposal of liquids dangerous to health.
1.
Disassemble themosiphon system.
2.
Collect any liquids.
3.
Separate materials.
4.
Dispose according to the local regulations.
TSB E3 11.13
12 of 24
5. Installation
5. Installation
DANGER
Improper installation in explosive area

Danger of explosion!
DANGER
Consider the local applicable explosion proof regulations.
Improper electrical installation

Danger of explosion!
DANGER
For electrical installation consider additionally IEC 60079.
Incorrect power connection

Danger to life through electric shock!
Electric shock!
ATTENTION
Adhere to connection conditions of local energy supply companies.

Electrical connection must be performed by qualified electrician only.
Consider regulations IEC 30364 und IEC 60079
Impurities in the piping

Damage of mechanical seal!
Piping must be thoroughly cleaned before connecting.
Installation of piping requires observance of the following instructions:
Use stainless steel pipes with large cross section for piping.
Avoid large choking resistances in the pipes (e.g. tight radii of curvature).
Pipes must be laid upwards or downwards as short as possible to prevent air pockets.
The mounting height of the thermosiphon vessel should be 1 to 2 m above shaft axis (at horizontal
arrangement) or above barrier fluid inlet at the mechanical seal casing (at vertical arrangement). If
circulation is effected with pump device, a smaller distance is allowable.
Pipes must be clean and free of scales.
Cooling water pipes leading to the thermosiphon vessel must be installed such that the maximum
operating pressure of the cooling coil will not be exceeded and the regulations applying on site are
maintained. The cooling water flow must be adjustable.
Drain connection is to be provided at the lowest point in the system.
Pipeline fixation with sound-proof pipe clamps spaced in intervals of max. 2 m.
TSB E3 11.13
13 of 24
5. Installation
If the system is working in connection with double mechanical seals, the nitrogen flushing must be
considered.
Withdrawing nitrogen from a gas grid
requires a check valve in the gas pipe leading to the thermosiphon vessel. If the pressure in the gas grid is
too high, a re-controllable pressure regulator is required. The thermosiphon system should be protected by
an additional safety valve.
Withdrawing nitrogen from a bottle
requires a re-controllable regulator.
If the system is working in connection with tandem mechanical seals, a bleeder pipe or overflow pipe
may additionally be required.
TSB E3 11.13
14 of 24
6. Commissioning
6. Commissioning
Prior to start-up check the following::
The thermosiphon system is properly electronically connected with all the monitoring equipment.
The vessel is filled with barrier fluid.
All monitoring devices are functioning.
6.1
Barrier fluid
A proper selection of the barrier fluid is of great importance for a perfect function of the mechanical seal.
The fluid may not have any negative affects on the mechanical seal and the environment. The following
aspects should be considered:
The barrier fluid must be compatible with the product handled.
Do not use any customary antifreezers. The additives of such products will affect the function of
mechanical seals.
Mixtures of water and technically pure propylene glycol (1,2-propandiol) shall be used.
Ethylenglycol as antifreeze is classified as harmful and subject to the classification according to
EU-Hazardous Substances Ordinance.
Do not use any motor-, turbine-, gear- or compressor oil. These oils contain additives which in
fact improve the oil quality, but lead to sediments between the sliding faces of mechanical seals,
the so called plating and consequently cause increasing leakage.
Light lube oils of viscosity class ISO VG 5 should be preferred. Good experiences are available
with the following oils:
- Shell Morlina 5
- Aral Vitam AC
- Klber Paraliq 12, Summit or alfa
- OMV Sealfluid SH2
The autoignition temperature of the barrier fluid should be at least 50K above the maximum
operating temperature of the pump.
The temperature of the barrier fluid must be certain below the atmospheric boiling point (20K).
Water used as quench fluid is in many cases an appropriate supply medium.

This however should only be used if it is compatible with the product and adverse reactions are
excluded.
Demineralized or distilled water should be preferred. Though, problems may occur with
hard/hard-pairing and highly stressed mechanical seals due to poor lubrication properties. This
necessarily requires consultation of the factory.
TSB E3 11.13
15 of 24
6. Commissioning
Following conditions must be maintained:

-The temperature at the seal outlet must not exceed 60C.
- The water may not contain any solids and not tend to sedimentation.
- Conductivity between 25-250 S/cm
- Water hardness 100 ppm CaCO3 (5,6dH)
- Chloride content < 250 ppm
- pH-value between 6,5 7,5
If ambient conditions are below the freezing point, low-temperature resistant barrier fluids shall
be used, preferably the alcohols ethanol or propanol. Both substances however are covered by
TA-Luft due to their high vapour pressure. Connection with air can easily form ignitable
mixtures. Alternatively, thermal oils suitable for low temperatures, e.g. Sylterm XLT, can be
used.
White oils are high quality lubricants. They are synthesized from paraffin oils and therefore
excellently suitable as barrier fluid. However, the maximum temperature is limited to 60C.
In general, we recommend to use the following barrier fluids:

Medium
Water/Propylene glycol
Light lube oil (OMV SH2 )
Propanol
Thermal oil, e.g. Syltherm XLT
6.2
Viscosity in cSt at
40C
12
5
1
5
Operating temperature C
Minimum
Maximum
-20
80
20
150
-40
20
-40
200
Mechanical seal in Tandem arrangement
Each start-up must be performed in following steps:
Filling of the thermosiphon vessel with clean barrier fluid up to the middle of sight glass (NLL).
Filling can be done through the filling hole provided on the vessel.
The filling level is mostly monitored by means of level switch with MIN-(LLL) and MAXContact (HLL). The MAX-contact is not aopplicable at the operating method with bleeder pipe or
overflow pipe.
Opening of the cooling water pipe respectively adjustment of the flow rate.
After initiation of the thermosiphon system, the respective mechanical seal may be loaded product side
and the pump can be started.
TSB E3 11.13
16 of 24
6. Commissioning
6.3
Double mechanical seal
Each start-up must be performed in following steps:
Filling of the thermosiphon vessel with clean barrier fluid up to the middle of sight glass (NLL).
Filling can be done through the filling hole provided on the vessel or by a hand-refill pump.
The filling level is monitored by means of level switch with MIN-contact.
The barrier pressure is to be set in constant height approx. 10% but at least 2 bar above the
highest appearing operating pressure of the mechanical seal. At pressure variations, a sufficient
safety distance must be available.
Opening of the cooling water pipe respectively adjustment of the flow rate.
After initiation of the thermosiphon system, the respective mechanical seal may be loaded product side
and the pump can be started.
When using a diaphragm accumulator, proceed as follows:
The diaphragm accumulator is delivered with the filling pressure as stated on the name tag and is
mounted to the thermosiphon vessel.
Open one of the overhead screw connections on the vessel and fill in the barrier fluid slowly until
liquid emerges.
Plug the screw connection and continue the filling with the refill unit until the maximum barrier
pressure is reached.
Vent the thermosiphon system repeatedly during filling.
The maximum barrier pressure can be taken from documentation, data sheet or dimensional
drawing.
CAUTION
Leakage of barrier fluid

Danger for individuals and environment!
TSB E3 11.13
Retighten screw plugs on fluid and gas sides.
17 of 24

7.1
Safety regulations
DANGER
Improper stressrelief at double mechanical seals

Fire hazard! Risk of injury!
7.2
For stressrelief take safeguard measures for individuals and environment.
Operating surveillance
The thermosiphon system does not require routine maintenance. However, regular inspections in order to
control liquid level, pressure and temperature should take place.
The entire equipment shall be examined half-yearly on leaks, loosened piping anchorage or other
damages.
TSB E3 11.13
18 of 24
8. Hazard analysis
8. Hazard analysis
8.1
Pressure
Allowable internal pressure:

Static pressure:
25 bar
yes
Hazards: The pressure can cause bursting of the pressure vessel if inadmissible operating conditions
occur. The fluid may be toxic, corrosive or otherwise harmful or hazardous. If the fluid escapes into the
environment, the physical state of the fluid may change if the evaporation point is exceeded. Depending
on the fluid, harmful or hazardous vapours may form in the ambient atmosphere. Inhaling the vapours or
contact with the fluid may result in injuries. Emerging fluid can cause fire hazard or explosion.
8.2
Temperature
Allowable temperature min.:
- 60C
Hazards: Contact with emerging fluid can cause burnlike injuries. If the fluid escapes into the
environment, the physical state of the fluid may change when the evaporation point is exceeded. Toxic,
corrosive or otherwise harmful or hazardous vapours may form. Due to the change in physical state from
liquid to gaseous, the volume of escaping fluid changes also. The fluid mixes with the atmosphere.
Inhaling the vapours or contact with the fluid can result in injuries.
Allowable temperature max.:
+ 200C
Hazards: Contact with the fluid will cause burns. If the fluid escapes into the environment, the physical
state of the fluid may change if the evaporation point is exceeded. Hot, toxic, corrosive or otherwise
harmful or hazardous vapours may form. Due to the change in physical state from liquid to gaseous, the
volume of escaping fluid changes also. The fluid mixes with the atmosphere. Inhaling the vapours or
contact with the fluid can result in injuries. Emerging fluid can cause fire hazard or explosion.
8.3
Corrosion
Outside:
Hazards: Aggressive fluids such as chlorides in the environment can lead to corrosion. Condensate may
occur on the surface and leads in conjunction with the fluids from environment to corrosion of the
surface.
Inside:
Hazards: Aggressiv buffer fluids in connection with adverse operating temperatures may attack the
material and lead to corrosion. The buffer fluid may also contain sealing fluid and therefore have a highly
corrosive effect.
TSB E3 11.13
19 of 24
8. Hazard analysis
8.4
Protective measures
The following protective measures have been taken in order to eliminate or to exclude the hazards
mentioned before as far as possible.
8.4.1 Application of suitable materials
Basic materials according to the Pressure Vessel Guideline and the AD-2000 Legislation, suitable
for the service conditions.
Application of proof tested and admitted welding filler materials.
Sealing materials are suitable for pressure, temperature and medium.
Sight glasses are according to manufacturers statement suitable for pressure, temperature and
medium.
8.4.2 Design and construction
Applied legislations are the Pressure Vessel Guideline and the AD-2000 Legislation.
Extensive references on applications with proven design are available.
Use of CrNiMo-steel with austenitic structure is possible on customers request.
Information on pressure- and temperature limitation included in the instruction manual.
8.4.3 Manufacture and inspection
Welding procedure with auditing of procedures according to AD-2000 HP 2/1.

Manufacturer Qualification according to ISO 9001.
Welder and welder supervisors with qualification according to AD-2000 HP3.
Qualification of the staff for manufacture, assembly and testing according to Dickow-QMSystem, complying with ISO 9001.
Manufacturing tolerances according to AD-2000 HP1 and details hereof indicated in the shop
drawings.
Utilisation of the allowable stress in the welded joint 85%.
Final inspection on each vessel according to AD-2000 Legislation, series HP.
TSB E3 11.13
20 of 24
9. Documentation
9. Documentation
The following papers are always part of the documentation for thermosiphon systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operating manual for thermosiphon vessel

Operating manual for the installed monitoring and safety devices
Type- and pressure test certificate
Inspection certificate 3.1 according to DIN EN 10204 for the used materials
Data sheet for thermosiphon vessel
Declaration of conformity according to Pressure Vessel Guideline 97/23/EG
TSB E3 11.13
21 of 24
10. Data Sheet / Certificate
10. Data sheet / Certificate

10.1 Data sheet Thermosiphon Vessel
Data sheet - THERMOSIPHON VESSEL
Design data:
Volume: 8 litre
Pressure: max. 25 bar
Temperature: max. 200C
P.O. No.:
Item No.:
Customer:
Pump serial No.:
Pump type:
Design:
without cooling coil
23.TSB.1
46.66
with cooling coil
23.TSB.1
46.70
St
1.4571
St
1.4571
Mark the required accessories and material
1
Plastic/Ms
1.4571
Plastic/Ms
1.4571
G 1/2
411.17; 903.17
G 1/2
411.18/19
691
741.2
903.18
1.4571
1.4571
TS003/03.20
G 1/2
G 1/2
G 1/2
G 1/2
G2
8
9
10
11
G 3/8
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 3/4
12
G 1/8
13
14
G 1/2
G 1/2
1.4571
--St/FKM
St
1.4571
3
4
411.20 / 903.20
411.21 / 903.21
411.22 / 903.22 692
411.23; 710.1 731.23; 731.34
741.1
412.24
695.1
903.24
54.VP.1
54.VP.1
411.26; 903.26; 695.3
411.27; 903.27; 595
411.28; 903.28 655 / 742
731.28 / 710.3
Pressure gas connection

Pressure gauge 0 10 bar, 100
Pressure gauge 0 25 bar, 100
Manometer Type 233.30 NG 100, 0-25 bar; chemical design; max. 100C;
EN-837-1 with inductive limit signal sensor Type 831.1
Universal connection
Filling
Thermometer Typ A5400; 0-160C; connection on reverse side;
with thermowell 10x63 lg.
Drain; valve
Float switch Typ 60-ARV2-VS-L260/12-V52A-Ex
L1 = LSH = 140mm; upper switchpoint at rising liquid level (plan 52)
L2 = LSH = 210mm; lower switchpoint at falling liquid level (plan 52/53)
Supply circulation
Return circulation
Optoelectronic level detector 720.211.30000.0660
Diaphragm accumulator Type 0,32-210 filling pressure p =
Refill unit including check valve
Cooling water outlet
Cooling water inlet
Documentation:
Inspection Certificate 3.1 acc. to EN 10204

Type- and Pressure Test Certificate for pressure vessels
I.O.M Manual for thermosiphon vessel and monitoring- resp. safety devices
Declaration of Conformity acc. to. Pressure Vessel Guideline
Comment:
According to Pressure Vessel Guideline 97/23/EG, the thermosiphon vessel is suitable for
hazardous liquids of group 1 and is subject to the Conformity Valuation Procedure of category
II. The modules B1 and C1 are chosen.
issued (date / signature)
TSB E3 11.13
techn.verified by (date / signature)
22 of 24
10.2 Type- and Pressure Test Certificate

Bescheinigung ber die Bau- und Druckprfung von
Druckbehlter
Certificate on the inspection of construction and pressure testing of pressure vessel
Besteller:
Customer:
Best.-Nr.:
Order-No.:
Gegenstand:
Equipment:
Thermosiphonbehlter mit Khlschlange

Thermosiphon vessel with cooling coil
Hersteller:
Manufacturer:
Dickow Pumpen KG
Zeichnungs-Nr.:
Drawing-No.:
Anforderungen:
Requirements:
Best.-Datum:
Order Date:
Pumpen-Seriennr.:
Pump Serial No.:
Druckgerterichtlinie 97/23/EG Kategorie II
Pressure vessel guideline 97/23/EG Category II
Fabr.-Nr.:
Ser.-No.:
Modul / Module B1+C1

Baujahr:
Year of fabr.:
Raum, druckbeaufschlagt / Pressure vessel

Behlter / Vessel
Khlschlange / Cooling Coil
Auslegungsdaten
Design Data
Max. zulssiger Betriebsdruck
Max. Operating pressure [bar]
25
40
Inhalt
Volume [L]
0,37
Zulssige Betriebstemperatur [C]

Allowable Operating Temperature
200
200
Prfberdruck bei 20C

Test Pressure at 20C [bar]
43
60
Prfgrundlage:
Test conditions:
AD-Merkblatt 2000
Es wurde eine Wasserdruckprfung durchgefhrt: ohne Befund

Standzeit:
30 min
A hydrostatic pressure test was carried out: without failure
Test time:
Prfung der Kennzeichnung: ohne
Sichtprfung: ohne Beanstandungen
Makontrolle (Stichproben): ohne Beanstandung
Beanstandung
Visual inspection: without failure
Dimension check (random test): without failure
Inspection of marking: without failure
Ergebnis der Prfungen:
Die gestellten Anforderungen sind erfllt.
Prfstempel:
D1
Test results: o.k.
According to requirements.
Test stamp:
Der Druckbehlter stimmt hinsichtlich Werkstoffen, Abmessungen und Herstellung, insbesondere den Fgeverfahren mit den auf der
Zeichnung festgelegten Vorgaben berein. Fr die in der Zeichnung angegebenen Werkstoffe liegen Bescheinigungen ber
Werkstoffprfungen vor.
The pressure vessel corresponds to the requirements of the drawing in respect to materials, dimensions and manufacture, especially the
welding procedure. Material test certificates for the materials specified are available.
Waldkraiburg, den
___________________________
Abnahmebeauftragter
Authorised Inspection Representative
TSB E3 11.13
23 of 24
10.3 Declaration of Conformity

Declaration of Conformity
acc. to Directive 97/23/EG
for a pressure equipment
The manufacturer
Dickow Pumpen KG
Siemensstr. 22
84478 Waldkraiburg
herewith declares that thepressure equipment
Description:
Thermosiphon vessel 46.66 / 70
Serial No.:
max. allowable pressure PS:
25
bar
allowable min/max temperature TS:
-60 to +200
Volume V:
Year of manufacture:
Test pressure PT:
Test fluid:
bar
Water
corresponds with the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC

Applied conformity
assessment procedures:
Modul B1 + C1
Applied standards and technical

specifications
AD 2000, DIN EN 287-1
Other applied EC-Directives:
non
Engaged notified bodies:

Surveillance of the QS-System:
Examination / inspections / test
during manufacture
Certificates which are included:
./.
TV Industrie Service GmbH
EC-Design Examination Certificate No.:
P-IS-DD1-TRT-05-01-531-001-Z004666
EC-Declaration of Conformity No.:
P-IS-DD1-TRT-05-01-531-01
EC-Type Examination Certificate No.:
./.
Location, Date:
Waldkraiburg,
Signature
TSB E3 11.13
24 of 24
Operating
instructions
GB
Pressure gauge model 2 NS 63

per directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
II 2 GD c TX
Contents
1. Safety
2. Description
3. Specifications and intended use
4. Commissioning
5. Maintenance and cleaning
Appendix 1: Declaration of conformity
formodels 23x.50/53.063 and 23x.30.063
Declarations of conformity see www.wika.de.

2094366.05 01/2011 GB/D
Specifications: see data sheet on www.wika.de

Subject to technical modifications.
2010 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Strae 30
63911 Klingenberg Germany
Tel.
(+49) 9372/132-0
Fax
(+49) 9372/132-406
E-Mail info@wika.de
www.wika.de
1. Safety
WARNING!
Before installation, commissioning and operation, ensure that the appropriate
pressure gauge has been selected in terms of measuring range, design and
specific measuring conditions.
The compatibility of the materials under pressure with the medium must be checked!
In order to guarantee the measuring accuracy and long-term stability specified, the
corresponding load limits must be observed.
Serious injuries and/or damage can occur should these not be observed.
Only qualified persons authorised by the plant manager are permitted to install,
maintain and service the pressure gauges.
2. Description
Nominal size 63 mm
The gauges measure the pressure by means of resilient bourdon tube pressure
elements
The measuring characteristics are in accordance with EN 837-1 standard
In addition, the enclosing and the pressurised components of models 23x.30 also meet
the requirements of this standard, relating to safety pressure gauges with a solid baffle
wall (code S3).
3. Specifications and intended use

Pressure limitation
Model 23x.50/53:
Steady:
3/4 full scale value
Fluctuating: 2/3 full scale value
Short time: full scale value
Model 23x.30:
Steady:
full scale value
Fluctuating: 0.9 full scale value
Short time: 1.1 full scale value
Mechanical connection
In accordance with the general technical regulations for pressure gauges (i.e. EN 837-2
"Selection and installation recommendations for pressure gauges").
When screwing gauges in, the force
required for this must not be applied
through the case, but rather through the
spanner flats (using a suitable tool) provided for this purpose on the square shaft of
standard connections.
Installation with
spanner
Correct sealing of pressure gauge connections with parallel threads must be made
using suitable sealing rings, sealing washers or WIKA profile seals. The sealing of tapered
threads (e.g. NPT threads) is made by providing the thread , with additional sealing
material such as, for example, PTFE tape (EN 837-2).
Spanner flats
Sealing face
Sealing by
the thread
The torque depends on the seal used. Connecting the gauge using a clamp socket or a
union nut is recommended, so that it is easier to orientate the gauge correctly.
When a blow-out device is fitted to a pressure gauge, it must be protected against being
blocked by debris and dirt. With safety pressure gauges (see dial symbol k) it must be
ensured that the free space behind the blow-out back is at least 15 mm.
After mounting, set the compensating valve (if available) from
CLOSE to OPEN.
Temperature effect
When the temperature of the measuring system deviates from
the reference temperature (+20 C): max. 0.4 %/10 K of full scale value
IP Ingress protection
Enclosing case IP 65 (EN 60529 / IEC 529)
Operating temperature
Ambient: Model 232 -40 ... +60 C

Model 233 -20 ... +60 C
Medium: The permissible medium temperature does not only depend on the instrument
design, but also on the ignition temperature of the surrounding gases, vapours
or dust. Both aspects have to be taken into account. For permissible maximum
medium temperatures see table 1

Attention! In the case of gaseous substances, the temperature may increase due to
compression warming. In these cases it may be necessary to throttle the rate of change
of pressure or reduce the permissible medium temperature.
Table 1: Permissible medium temperature
Temperature class of the ambient
atmosphere (ignition temperature)
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
(85 C < T 100 C)

(100 C < T 135 C)
(135 C < T 200 C)
(200 C < T 300 C)
(300 C < T 450 C)
(T > 450 C)
Maximum permissible medium temperature (in

the measuring system)
Models 232
(dry gauges)
+70 C
+85 C
+120 C
+185 C
+200 C
+200 C
Models 233
(liquid-filled gauges)
+70 C
+85 C
+100 C
+100 C
+100 C
+100 C
The effective maximum surface temperature is not only dependant upon these instruments,
but mainly on the respective medium temperature!
Materials
Wetted parts:
Movement:
Dial and pointer:
Case, bezel ring:
Window:
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
Aluminium
Stainless steel (model 23x.30: with blow-out back)
Laminated safety glass
Installation
Nominal position per EN 837-1 / 9.6.7 figure 9: 90 ( )
Process connection lower mount (LM) or back mount (BM)
In order to avoid any additional heating, the instruments must not be exposed to direct
solar irradiation while in operation!
Pressure gauges must be earthed via the process connection!
Permissible ambient and operating temperatures
When mounting the pressure gauge it must be ensured that, taking into consideration the
influence of convection and heat radiation, no deviation above or below the permissible
ambient and medium temperatures can occur. The influence of temperature on the display
accuracy must be observed.
Permissible vibration load at the installation site

The instruments should always be installed in locations free from vibration.
If necessary, it is possible to isolate the instrument from the mounting point by installing a flexible connection line between the measuring point and the pressure gauge and
mounting the instrument on a suitable bracket.
If this is not possible, the following limit values must not be exceeded:
Dry gauges:
Frequency range < 150 Hz
(Model 232)
Acceleration < 0.7 g (7 m/s2)
Liquid-filled gauges: Frequency range < 150 Hz
(Model 233)
Acceleration < 4 g (40 m/s2)
The liquid filling must be checked on a regular basis.
The liquid level must not drop below 75 % of the gauge diameter.
4. Commissioning
During the commissioning process pressure surges must be avoided at all costs. Open the
shut-off valves slowly.

The instruments are maintenance-free.
The indicator and switching function should be checked once or twice every year. The
gauge must be disconnected from the process to check with a pressure testing device.
Clean the pressure gauge with a moist cloth.
Repairs must only be carried out by the manufacturer or appropriately qualified skilled
personnel.
When dismounting, close the compensating valve (if available).
WARNING!
Residual media in dismounted pressure gauges can result in a risk to persons,
the environment and equipment.
Take sufficient precautionary measures.
Appendix 1: Declaration of conformity
Mechanical
temperature measurement
Bimetal thermometer
Model 54, industrial series
WIKA data sheet TM 54.01
for further approvals
see page 6
Applications
General process instrumentation in the chemical and
petrochemical industries, oil and gas industries, energy

and water/wastewater industries
Temperature measurement in harsh and aggressive
environments
With liquid damping also suitable for applications with high
vibrations
Special features
Application range from -70 ... +500 C
Case and stem from stainless steel
Bimetal with zero point adjustment at the back of the case

Individual stem length from 63 ... 1,000 mm
Germanischer Lloyd approval (option)
Description
The model 54 bimetal thermometer has been developed and
is manufactured in accordance with the EN13190 standard.
The thermometer meets the high requirements of the process
industries.
Especially in the chemical and petrochemical, oil and
gas, power engineering and shipbuilding industries, the
temperature measuring instrument manufactured from
stainless steel is used successfully. Through the high ingress
protection of the thermometer (IP65) and its liquid damping,
operation under high vibration conditions is possible.
Fig. left: bimetal thermometer model A5402

Fig. right: bimetal thermometer, adjustable stem and
dial version model S5412
The model 54 satisfies the high requirements for resistance

against aggressive media. As an option, the casing, the
stem and the process connection can be made from
316Ti(1.4571).
To allow optimum fitting to the process, individual insertion
lengths and different process connections can be selected.
WIKA data sheet TM 54.01 05/2014
Page 1 of 6
Standard version
Measuring element
Bimetal coil
Permissible operating pressure at the stem

max. 25 bar, static
Nominal size in mm
63, 80, 100, 160
Permissible ambient temperature at case

-20 ... +60 C (others on request)
Connection designs
S Standard (male thread connection) 1)
1 Plain stem (without thread)
2 Male nut
3 Union nut
4 Compression fitting (sliding on stem)
5 Union nut with fitting
Temperature limits for storage and transport

-20 ... +60 C (EN 13190)
1) Not for version adjustable stem and dial
Model overview
Model
A5400
A5401
A5402
A5403
R5440
R5441
R5442
R5443
S5410
S5411
S5412
S5413
NS
63
80
100
160
63
80
100
160
63
80
100
160
Design
Ingress protection
IP 65 per EN 60529 / IEC 529
Options
Scale range F, C/F (dual scale)
Liquid damping up to max. 250 C (at the sensor)
Back mount (axial)
GL approval in connection with liquid damping, not with
Lower mount (radial)
Back mount, adjustable stem and dial
Accuracy class
Class 1 per EN 13190
adjustable stem and dial design or NS160, vibration

loading 25 ... 200 Hz, 5 g (for further information see
certificate No. 40156-01 HH)
Laminated safety glass, polycarbonate
Stem diameter 6, 10 mm
Ingress protection IP 66
Thermometer with electrical output signal (data sheet
TV15.01)
Special measuring ranges or dial printing to customer
specifications (on request)
Version per ATEX Ex II 2 GD c TX, see marking on the
instrument
Working range
Normal (1 year):
Measuring range (EN 13190)
Short time (24 h max.): Scale range (EN 13190)
Case, ring
Stainless steel 1.4301 (304)
Stem, process connection
Stainless steel 1.4571 (316Ti)
Elbow behind the case
Aluminium, only with lower mount version
Dial
Aluminium, white, black lettering
Window
Instrument glass
Pointer
Aluminium, black, adjustable pointer
Insertion length L1
63 ... 1,000 mm
minimum/maximum length is dependent on the measuring
range and diameter
Page 2 of 6
Scale ranges, measuring ranges 1), error limits (EN 13190)

Scale graduation per WIKA standard
Measuring range 1)
in C
Scale range
in C
Scale spacing
in C
-20 ... +40

-10 ... +50
10 ... 50
10 ... 70
10 ... 90
10 ... 110
20 ... 140
20 ... 180
30 ... 220
30 ... 270
50 ... 350
50 ... 450
-30 ... +50

-20 ... +60
0 ... 60
0 ... 80
0 ... 100
0 ... 120
0 ... 160
0 ... 200
0 ... 250
0 ... 300
0 ... 400
0 ... 500
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
Error limit
C
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2.5
5
5
5
1) The measuring range is indicated on the dial by two triangular marks. Only within this range is the stated error limit valid per EN 13190.
Connection designs
3073050.05
Design standard (male thread connection) 1)

Standard insertion length l1 = 100, 160, 200, 250 mm
Nominal size Process connection Dimensions in mm

NS
63, 80, 100, 160 G B

GB
NPT
NPT
SW
14
16
19
20
27
32
22
30
d4
26
32
-
8
8
8
8
1) Not for version adjustable stem and dial
Legend:
G
Male thread
i
Thread length
d4 Diameter of the sealing
collar
SW
d
l2
Spanner width
Stem diameter
active length
Legend:
a
Distance to the case/articulated joint
d1 Plain diameter
d
l2
Stem diameter
active length
Legend:
G
Male thread
i
Thread length incl. collar
SW Spanner width
d Stem diameter
l2
active length
3073050.05
Design 1, plain stem (without thread)

Standard insertion lengths I1 = 100, 140, 160, 200, 240, 290 mm
Basis for design 4, compression fitting
Nominal size Dimensions in mm
NS
d1
63, 80, 100, 160 18
d
8
a for
axial
15
a for
adjustable stem and dial
25
3073050.05
Design 2, male nut

Standard insertion length l1 = 140, 180, 230 mm

NS
63, 80, 100, 160 G B

M18 x 1.5
20
12
SW
27
24
d
8
8
Page 3 of 6
3073050.05
Design 3, union nut


NS
G1
63, 80, 100, 160 G

G
M20 x 1.5
8.5
10.5
13.5
SW
27
32
32
8
8
8
Legend:
G1 Female thread
i
Thread length
SW Spanner width
d Stem diameter
l2
active length
3073050.05
Design 4, compression fitting (sliding on stem)

Insertion length l1 = variable
Length L = l1 + 40 mm

NS
63, 80, 100, 160 G B

GB
NPT
NPT
14
16
19
20
SW
27
32
22
30
d4
26
32
-
d
8
8
8
8
Sealing ring
Legend:
G
Male thread
i
Thread length
collar
SW Spanner width
d Stem diameter
l2
active length
Legend:
G
Male thread
i
Thread length
collar
SW Spanner width
d Stem diameter
active length
l2
3073050.05
Design 5, union nut and fitting


NS
63, 80, 100, 160 G B

GB
NPT
NPT
Page 4 of 6
14
16
19
20
SW
27
32
22
30
d4
26
32
-
d
8
8
8
8
Dimensions in mm
NS
63
80
100
160
Dimensions in mm
20
20
22
25
b1 1)
35
35
37
40
b2
38
38
40
43
Lower mount (radial)
68
77
107
161
d4
8 2)
8 2)
8 2)
8 2)
F 1)
26
26
26
26
47
56
66
96
1) With scale ranges 0 ... 300 C the dimensions increase by 40 mm

2) Option: Stem 6, 10 mm
R
U
Dimensions in mm
63
80
100
160
20
20
22
25
b3
63
63
65
68
Weight in kg
0.20
0.25
0.35
0.50
0.30
0.35
0.45
0.60
Back mount (BM)

Lower mount (LM)
3280854.01
Adjustable stem and dial version
NS
3280919.01
3280897.01
Back mount (axial)
68
77
107
161
8 1)
8 1)
8 1)
8 1)
66
66
66
66
Weight
in kg
0.35
0.40
0.50
0.65
1) Option: Stem 6, 10 mm
Page 5 of 6
Thermowell
CE conformity
In principle, the operation of a mechanical thermometer

without a thermowell with low process-side loading (low
pressure, low viscosity and low flow velocities) is possible.
ATEX directive (option)

94/9/EC, II 2 GD c TX
However, in order to enable exchanging the thermometer

during operation (e.g. instrument replacement or calibration)
and to ensure a better protection of the instrument and
also the plant and the environment, it is advisable to use a
thermowell from the extensive WIKA thermowell portfolio.
For further information on the calculation for the thermowell,
see Technical information IN 00.15.
Approvals (option)
GOST-R, import certificate, Russia
GOST, metrology/measurement technology, Russia

GL, ships, shipbuilding (e.g. offshore), Germany
CRN, safety (e.g. electr. safety, overpressure, ...), Canada
Certificates (option)
2.2 test report
3.1 inspection certificate
DKD/DAkkS calibration certificate
Approvals and certificates, see website
Ordering information
Model / Nominal size / Scale range / Connection design / Connector size / Insertion length l1 / Options
Page 6 of 6
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Strae 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
Tel.
+49 9372 132-0
Fax
+49 9372 132-406
info@wika.de
www.wika.de
05/2014 GB
2008 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG, all rights reserved.
The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineering at the time of publishing.
We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
Operating Instructions
Betriebsanleitung
Bimetal Thermometers
GB
Bimetall-Thermometer
also per directive

auch nach Richtlinie
94/9/EG (ATEX)
Examples
GB Operating instructions Bimetal thermometers Page 3-28
Seite 29-54
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
D Betriebsanleitung Bimetall-Thermometer
Contents
Contents
1.
General information
2.
Transport and storage
3.
Safety instructions
4.
Installation conditions and installation
5.
Troubleshooting Measures
6.
Indicator check
7.
Indicator correction
8.
Electrical alarm contacts
9.
10.
Maintenance and servicing / cleaning
10
11.
Repairs
11
12.
Disposal
11
Enclosure 1: Declaration of conformity for Model 53 without contacts
12
13
14
Enclosure 4: Declaration of conformity for Model 55 without alarm

contacts Model 831
15
Enclosure 5: EC prototype test certificate (Ex certificate for gases)

for slot-type initiators of types SJ (WIKA Model 831)
16-18
Enclosure 6: EC prototype test certificate (Ex certificate for gases)

for SN sensors of types SJ (WIKA Model 831 SN / S1N)
19-22
Enclosure 7: EC prototype test certificate (Ex certificate for dusts) for

proximity sensors of types SJ (WIKA Model 831 and 831 SN / S1N)
23-27
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
Information
This symbol provides you with information, notes and tips.
Warning!
This symbol warns you against actions that can cause injury to
people or damage to the instrument.
WIKA Operating instructions Bimetal thermometers
GB
1. General information / ... / 4. Installation conditions and installation

1. General information
Please read these operating instructions before commissioning
the thermometer.
GB
These operating instructions contain information on mounting, commissioning and maintenance. Besides these operating instructions you
should also observe existing standards, supplementary technical data,
specifications on the type plate and, if necessary, additional certificates.
Designated use: The bimetal thermometer is used mostly in the process
industry to monitor and control the temperature of the process.
2. Transport and storage

The thermometers must be kept dry and clean during storage and transportation. Avoid shocks and vibrations. Protect the thermometers from direct sunlight,
dust, insects, humidity and other aggressive atmospheres. We recommend
that, for temperatures around the dew point (1 C around 0 C), you always
use liquid damping. The packaging material is transparent in order to prevent
any enclosed accessories getting lost.
Permissible storage temperature: -20 C +60 C
3. Safety instructions
The appropriate national safety regulations (i.e. VDE 0100 / EN 60
079-14 / 837-2) must be observed when installing, commissioning
and operating these devices.
4. Installation conditions and installation

Before installation ensure that all the necessary accessories needed for the
mounting method have been delivered. The accessories will be either on the
instrument or supplied in a separate bag, which in most cases will be attached
to the thermometer.
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
Do not work on gauges with alarm contacts unless the power has been
isolated.
Serious injury and/or damage can occur if the appropriate regulations are not
observed.
Only appropriately qualified personnel should work on these instruments.
4. Installation conditions and installation
GB
Installation using
a spanner
When mounting a rotatable and inclinable bimetal thermometer, specific

instructions must be followed. In order to set the indicator to the desired position, the following steps must be taken:
1. The lock nut or union nut must be loosened at the process connection.
2. The hexagon bolts and slotted screws at the swivel joint must be loosened.
loosen
Make sure to loosen the screws
on the opposite side as well!
3. Position the indicator as required, tighten the hexagon bolts and slotted
screws, and finally tighten the lock nut or union nut firmly.
If a thermowell is used, the stem must not be allowed to touch the bottom of
the thermowell.
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
Ambient conditions
Thermometers that do not meet with case ingress protection (IP 65) must be
protected from humidity and other aggressive atmospheres.
Observe the following points during sensor installation:
If possible, the whole length of the sensor should be exposed to the temperature to be measured.
In pipelines or other measuring points the temperature probe should be
directed as far towards the flow as possible.
When using thermowells they must be filled with a thermal contact medium
in order to reduce the heat transfer resistance between the outer wall of the
sensor and the inner wall of the thermowell. The working temperature of the
thermal compound is -40 C to +200 C.
4. Installation conditions and installation / ... / 6. Indicator check

For filled devices, ensure that the medium temperature remains below 250 C.
The reason: At temperatures over 250 C, the filling fluid in the stem can cloud
or change colour and, in some cases, catch fire.
Before installing the probe, check whether the probe material used (speciGB
fied in the delivery note) is chemically resistant/neutral to the medium being
measured. This also applies to thermowells.
Heat conduction errors occur when the size, volume or area of the medium
to be measured is very small, so that the temperature probe becomes
noticeable as a thermal mass. Heat conduction errors may also occur when
the insertion length is not sufficient, or when the instrument mounting fittings
are attached to a good heat conductor (e.g. metal plates) and the temperature difference between them and the medium to be measured is very high.
Attention!
Do not fill hot thermowells. There is a danger that the oil may spurt out!
5. Troubleshooting measures
Bimetal thermometers, both with and without contacts, are maintenance-free
instruments according to their basic design. As measuring instruments, their
measuring accuracy should be checked at application-specific intervals. The
wear condition of probes exposed to a permanent thermal stress (even if this
stress is very low), and of electro-mechanical contacts exposed to vibratory
stress, must be checked from time to time. If any visible damage is found, the
instrument must be replaced.
6. Indicator check
Indicator checks should only be carried out in comparison with a more accurate
instrument or, if possible, with a calibrated instrument. The temperature during
the check must remain constant.Fluctuating temperatures may lead to reading
errors caused by the different response times of the probes.
For thermometers with protective sleeves, a minimum waiting time of at least

15 minutes, for temperature equalisation, should be observed, provided the
appropriate immersion length is adhered to.
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
For thermometers without protective sleeves, a minimum waiting time of 10

minutes, for temperature equalisation, should be observed, provided the appropriate immersion length is adhered to.
7. Indicator correction / 8. Electrical alarm contacts

7. Indicator correction
Any interference with or modification to the instrument will invalidate
the warranty!
Indicator corrections on bimetal thermometers with contacts may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or in adequately equipped workshops by qualified persons.
The micro-adjustment mechanism built into the pointer should only be
operated using a screwdriver, and only if the thermometer has been
damaged due to improper handling, severe shocks, during transport, etc.
When correcting an indication error using the micro-adjustment mechanism,
a calibrated thermometer must be used for comparison. Subsequently, the
thermometer must be checked at several temperature points.
8. Electrical alarm contacts

Bimetal thermometers (only type 55) can be equipped with sliding, inductive or
electronic contacts. (see data sheet AC 08.01)
In most cases, bimetal thermometers with contacts are used as two-position controllers for on-off control or as three-position controllers for on-off-on
control with adjustable dead-band. In general thermometers contacts can only
carry the operating current of an interposing control relay.
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
The contact mechanism consists of the red set pointer and the measuredvalue pointer. The red set pointer can be adjusted using the supplied setting
tool. The measured-value pointer in a sliding contact mechanism consists of
a pair of drag pointers, which are held against the red set pointer by springs
and is opened and closed at the set value by means of an operating pin on the
measured-value pointer.
Electrical connection should only be carried out by qualified electricians.

The switches are terminated on screw terminals within the terminal box.
Conductor cross-section max. 1.5 mm2
The terminal assignment is stated on the connection plate of the thermometer
Adjusting the nominal-value pointer

The red set pointers for the alarm contacts are adjustable via the adjustment
lock on the window using an adjustment key (included in delivery; on standard
gauges this is found on the outside edge of the junction box.
GB
8. Electrical alarm contacts
red set pointers
GB
adjustment key
removable
adjustment lock
The red set pointers for the alarm contacts are adjustable over the full range
of the instrument. Switching points should be set in the range between 10 %
und 90 % of the full scale, to ensure switching accuracy and the long life of the
measuring mechanism.
8.1 Sliding contact Model 811
Sliding contacts are control switches which make or break connected electric
circuits as the contact arm, moved by the measured-value pointer, reaches the
appointed set-point.
Surface oxidation at the contact points may lead to malfunction, which can
result in contact-arcing, particularly in the case of intrinsically safe circuits (low
voltages and currents), and in the case of relatively high contact loads.
Since the indication must not be affected by the contact mechanism, actuating
forces, and therefore also the possible contact rating, are low.
Sliding contacts are not suitable for liquid-filled instruments!
The sliding contacts are not intrinsically safe and are, therefore, not suitable for
applications in hazardous areas!
8.2 Inductive alarm sensor Model 831

Inductive alarm sensors are non-contact inductive proximity sensors, which
make or break when a control flag, linked to the measured-value pointer, moves
adjacent to or disengages from the control head (slot-type initiator). Changes in
the signal level will then actuate a control unit (switch amplifier).
Details see data sheet AC 08.01.
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
8. Electrical alarm contacts / 9. Explosion protection

8.3 Electronic contact Model 830 E
Direct switching of low-level signals, which are typically used in conjunction
with a PLC, is possible using these inductive alarm contacts, complete with
integrated amplifiers, factory-fitted within the instrument.
The usual advantages of inductive contacts are also valid for this system, such
as highly-secure contact operation, zero wear due to non-contact operation
and virtually no adverse effect on the measuring system, thus ensuring the
accuracy of the indication.
No additional control unit is required.
The Model 830 E electronic contact is not intrinsically safe and, therefore, not
suitable for use in hazardous areas!
8.4 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC according to EN 60947-5-2
The instruments should be protected against strong electromagnetic fields.
8.5 Contact functions
The contact function of the respective alarm contact is determined by the index
1 or 2 after the model number.
1 = Contact makes when pointer approaches the set point in clockwise direction
2 = Contact breaks when pointer approaches the set point in clockwise direction
9. Explosion protection
The devices indicate the temperature to be measured by means of a bimetal
coil and an indicator shaft. The passive indication instrument does not influence
actively the temperature rise.
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
9.1 Labelling of the devices for use in hazardous areas

If instruments without contacts (only type 53, 54 and 55) are used in hazardous
areas, they are marked as follows on the dial:
PO number (Production order number from WIKA; all product and production
related information is saved under this number)
ATEX marking
II 2 GD c TxC IP65
GB
9. Explosion protection / 10. Maintenance and servicing, cleaning

9.2 EC prototype test certificate for inductive contacts of type 831
Standard version, Model 831.XX
PTB 99 ATEX 2219 X (Enclosure 2) and ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X (Enclosure 4)
Depending on the number of switches and on the case diameter, either
GB
Type SJ2-N ... or Type SJ3,5- ... -N ... is used.
Safety pattern version, Models 831.XX - SN or - S1N
PTB 00 ATEX 2049 X (Enclosure 3) and ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X (Enclosure 4)
Depending on the number of switches and enclosure on the case diameter,
either Models SJ 2-SN..., SJ 2-S1N..., SJ 3,.5-SN ... or SJ 3,.5-S1N ... are used.
The permissible limits for Ui, li and Pi of intrinsically safe supply circuits depend
on the sensor type. They can be taken from the corresponding EC-type test
certificates (also see Data sheet AC 08.01).
Suitable switch amplifiers are, for example:
Circuit
(s. Ex-certific.)
Model 1
Model 2
Sensor type Model designation EC-type examination certificate

Pepperl & Fuchs
WIKA
model
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
SN Sensors
SN Sensors
904.31
904.32
904.28
904.29
904.33
904.30
KFD2-SR2-Ex1
KFD2-SR2-Ex2
KFA6-SR2-Ex1
KFA6-SR2-Ex2
KFD2-SH-Ex1
KFA6-SH-Ex1
PTB 00 ATEX 2080

PTB 00 ATEX 2080
PTB 00 ATEX 2081
PTB 00 ATEX 2081
PTB 00 ATEX 2042
PTB 00 ATEX 2043
For further information on explosion protection see manufacturers declaration

of conformity for the thermometer, EC-type examination certificate and operating instructions for the electrical alarm contacts (enclosed, where applicable,
for the respective instrument version).
10. Maintenance and servicing / Cleaning
The instruments should be cleaned with a damp cloth, moistened with soap
solution. When cleaning the inside of the terminal box, the mains power must
be disconnected. All parts must be dry before the power is reconnected.
10
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
The instruments require no maintenance or servicing. The indicator and

switching function should be checked once or twice every 12 months. For this
the instrument must be disconnected from the process and checked using a
temperature calibrator.
11. Repairs / 12. Disposal

11. Repairs
Repairs are only to be carried out by the manufacturer.
GB
12. Disposal
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
Disposal of instrument components and packaging materials should be in

accordance with the respective waste treatment and disposal regulations of the
region or country to which the instrument is supplied.
11
Enclosure 1:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
12
Enclosure 2:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
13
Enclosure 3:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
14
Enclosure 4:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
15
Enclosure 5:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
16
Enclosure 5:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
17
Enclosure 5:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
18
Enclosure 6:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
19
Enclosure 6:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
20
Enclosure 6:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
21
Enclosure 6:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
22
Enclosure 7:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
23
Enclosure 7:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
24
Enclosure 7:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
25
Enclosure 7:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
26
Enclosure 7:
12968065 11/2008 GB/D
GB
27
Operating instructions
Betriebsanleitung
Mode d'emploi
Manual de instrucciones
Inductive contact model 831
in pressure and temperature gauges
Induktivkontakt Typ 831

in Druck- und Temperaturmessgerten
Contact inductif type 831
des manomtres et thermomtres
Contacto inductivo, modelo 831
en manmetros o termmetros
Inductive contact
Model 831.112
Inductive contact model 831.1

in pressure gauge model 232.50.100
GB
D
F
E
GB Operating instructions model 831
Page 3 - 24
D Betriebsanleitung Typ 831
Seite 25 - 46
F Mode demploi type 831
Page 47 - 56
E Manual de instrucciones modelo 831
Pgina 57 - 66
2010 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

All rights reserved. / Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
WIKA is a registered trademark in various countries.
WIKA ist eine geschtzte Marke in verschiedenen Lndern.
Prior to starting any work, read the operating instructions!
Keep for later use!
Lire le mode demploi avant de commencer toute opration !

A conserver pour une utilisation ultrieure !
Leer el manual de instrucciones antes de comenzar cualquier trabajo!
Guardar el manual para una eventual consulta!
22
WIKA operating instructions inductive contact model 831
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
Vor Beginn aller Arbeiten Betriebsanleitung lesen!

Zum spteren Gebrauch aufbewahren!
Contents
Contents
GB
1.
General information
2.
Safety
3.
Specifications
4.
Design and function
5.
Transport, packaging and storage
6.
Commissioning, operation
10
7.
Maintenance and cleaning
12
8.
Dismounting and disposal
12
13 - 15
Appendix 2: EC-type examination certificate (Ex approval for

gases) for SN sensors models SJ
(WIKA model 831-SN/S1N)
16 - 19
Appendix 3: EC-type examination certificate (Ex approval

for dusts) for proximity sensors models SJ
(WIKA model 831 and 831-SN/S1N)
20 - 24
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
Appendix 1: EC-type examination certificate (Ex approval for

gases) for slot sensors models SJ
(WIKA model 831)
designed and manufactured using state-of-the-art technology.
All components are subject to stringent quality and environmental criteria
during production. Our management systems are certified to ISO 9001 and
ISO 14001.
These operating instructions contain important information on handling the
inductive contacts. Working safely requires that all safety instructions and work
instructions are observed.
Observe the relevant local accident prevention regulations and general safety
regulations for the inductive contacts' range of use.
The operating instructions are part of the product and must be kept in the im-
mediate vicinity of the instruments with inductive contacts and readily accessible to qualified personnel at any time.
Skilled personnel must have carefully read and understood the operating
instructions, prior to beginning any work.
The manufacturer's liability is void in the case of any damage caused by
using the product contrary to its intended use, non-compliance with these
operating instructions, assignment of insufficiently qualified skilled personnel
or unauthorised modifications to the inductive contact.
The general terms and conditions, contained in the sales documentation, shall
apply.
Subject to technical modifications.

Further information:
- Internet address:
- Relevant data sheet:
www.wika.de / www.wika.com
AC 08.01
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
The inductive contacts described in the operating instructions have been
1. General information / 2. Safety

Explanation of symbols
WARNING!
... indicates a potentially dangerous situation that can result in
serious injury or death, if not avoided.
GB
Information
points out useful tips, recommendations and information for
efficient and trouble-free operation.
WARNING!
... indicates a potentially dangerous situation in a potentially
explosive atmosphere, resulting in serious injury or death, if not
avoided.
2. Safety
WARNING!
Before installation, commissioning and operation, ensure that
the appropriate inductive contact has been selected in terms of
design and specific measuring conditions.
Non-observance can result in serious injury and/or damage to
equipment.
Only work on the instrument with the voltage disconnected.
Further important safety instructions can be found in the individual chapters of these operating instructions.
2.1 Intended use
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
Inductive contacts are installed in pressure and temperature measuring

instruments. The instrument pointer of the measuring instrument moves the flag
of the inductive contact out of or into the slot sensor. The resulting change of the
current supply is used for triggering a switching amplifier.
The inductive contact has been designed and built solely for the intended use
described here and may only be used accordingly.
The manufacturer shall not be liable for claims of any type based on operation
contrary to the intended use.
2. Safety
2.2 Personnel qualification
WARNING!
Risk of injury should qualification be insufficient!
Improper handling can result in considerable injury and damage
to equipment.
The activities described in these operating instructions may
only be carried out by skilled personnel who have the qualifications described below.
GB
Skilled personnel
Skilled personnel are understood to be personnel who, based on their technical
training, knowledge of measurement and control technology and on their experience and knowledge of country-specific regulations, current standards and directives, are capable of carrying out the work described and independently recognising potential hazards.
2.3 Additional safety instructions for instruments per ATEX
WARNING!
Non-observance of these instructions and their contents may
result in the loss of explosion protection.
WARNING!
It is imperative that the application conditions and safety requirements of the EC-type examination certificate are followed.
Pressure gauges must be earthed via the process connection!
2.4 Special hazards
Dangerous pressure media such as oxygen, acetylene, flammable gases or

liquids, toxic gases or liquids as well as for refrigeration plants or compressors
require attention above the standard regulations. Here the specific safety codes or
regulations must be considered.
For additional important safety instructions see chapter "2.3 Safety instructions for
instruments per ATEX".
WARNING!
Residual media in dismounted measuring instruments can
result in a risk to persons, the environment and equipment. Take
sufficient precautionary measures.
6
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
WARNING!
Observe the information given in the applicable type examination
certificate and the relevant country-specific regulations for
installation and use in potentially explosive atmospheres (e.g.
IEC 60079-14, NEC, CEC). Non-observance can result in serious
injury and/or damage to equipment.
2. Safety
2.5 Labelling / safety marks
Product label
GB
Pin assignment
Date of manufacture
Explanation of symbols
Before mounting and commissioning the pressure gauge,
ensure you read the operating instructions!
CE, Communaut Europenne
Instruments bearing this mark comply with the relevant European
directives.
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
ATEX European Explosion Protection Directive

(Atmosphre = AT, explosible = Ex)
Instruments bearing this mark comply with the requirements of
the European Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) on explosion protection.
3. Specifications / 4. Design and function

3. Specifications
IP Ingress protection
GB The ingress protection to EN 60529 against external influences depends on the

basic instrument and is found in the respective data sheet.
Admissible ambient temperatures
The inductive contacts can be used in the range from -25 to +70 C (SN sensors
up to +100 C). Where the permissible temperatures for the basic instrument (see
data sheet) deviate from this range, the lower value is valid.
When operating in potentially explosive atmospheres, please note the reduced
values (see respective EC-type examination certificate).
For the type of the integrated slot sensors, see the measuring instrument's
product label.
4. Design and function

Description
The built-in electrical switch contacts are non-contact slot-type inductive proximity
sensors, which are powered from switching amplifiers with certified intrinsically
safe circuits. When the adjustable set points are reached, their output circuits will
be opened or closed.
As standard model 831 slot sensors, to EC-type examination certificate
PTB 99 ATEX 2219 X (see appendix 1) and ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X (see
appendix 3), are used
Model 831-SN and -S1N SN sensors, to PTB 00 ATEX 2049 X (see appendix
2) and ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X (see appendix 3), are special designs with
safety features (that are not relevant to explosion protection) for special
applications
Suitable switching amplifiers for model 831 are:

With type 1 circuit: Control unit KFD2-SR2-Ex1 and

KFD2-SR2-Ex2
With type 2 circuit: Control unit KFA6-SR2-Ex1 and

KFA6-SR2-Ex2 - model 904.28/29
Suitable switching amplifiers for model 831-SN and 831-S1N are:
With type 2 circuit: Control unit KFD2-SH-Ex1 and

KHA6-SH-Ex1 - model 904.30
8
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
The connected loads for the switches are in accordance with EN 60947-5-6
(NAMUR).
4. Design and function / 5. Transport, packaging ...

Scope of delivery
Cross-check scope of delivery with delivery note.
GB
5. Transport, packaging and storage

5.1 Transport
Check pressure gauge for any damage that may have been caused by transport.
Obvious damage must be reported immediately.
5.2 Packaging
Do not remove packaging until just before mounting.
Keep the packaging as it will provide optimum protection during transport (e.g.
change in installation site, sending for repair).
5.3 Storage
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
Permissible conditions at the place of storage:

Storage temperature: -20 ... +70 C
6. Commissioning, operation
In accordance with the general technical regulations for pressure and
temperature measuring instruments (e.g. EN 837-2 or EN 13190).
When screwing gauges in, the force required for this must not be applied through
the case, but rather through the spanner flats (using a suitable tool) provided for
this purpose on the square shaft of standard connections.
Installation with
spanner
With safety pattern gauges (see dial symbol k) you need to pay attention to the
fact that the free space behind the blow-out back will be at least 15 mm.
Requirements for the installation point
To avoid, amongst other things, switch signal "chatter", it must be ensured that the
instruments are mounted free of vibration.
If the measuring point is not sufficiently stable a measuring instrument support
such as a bracket or flange should be used for fastening (possibly via a flexible
capillary). If the pressure gauge is exposed to vibration or pulsating pressure
or both, then a liquid filled pressure gauge may provide considerably better
performance and readability. Instruments should be protected against coarse dirt
and wide fluctuations in ambient temperature.
Electrical connection
Connection of the switches via screw terminals in the terminal box
Conductor cross section max. 1.5 mm2
The terminal assignment is stated on the product label of the pressure or tem-
perature measuring instrument
The gauges must be connected to the equipotential bonding of the plant
10
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
Mechanical connection
The permissible limits of Ui, Ii and Pi for the intrinsically safe supply circuits
depend on the sensor type. They can be taken from the corresponding EC-type
examination certificates. (The sensor type is stated on the connection label of
the pressure or temperature measuring instrument.)
Suitable switching amplifiers are e.g.:
Circuit
Sensor type Model designation EC-type examination WIKA

Fa. Pepperl & Fuchs certificate
Model
Model 1

Model 2

standard
standard
standard
standard
SN-sensors
SN-sensors
(s. Ex certificate)
KFD2-SR2-Ex1
KFD2-SR2 Ex2
KFA6-SR2-Ex1
KFA6-SR2-Ex2
KFD2-SH-Ex1
KHA6-SH-Ex1
PTB 00 ATEX 2080

PTB 00 ATEX 2080
PTB 00 ATEX 2081
PTB 00 ATEX 2081
PTB 00 ATEX 2042
PTB 00 ATEX 2043
904.31
904.32
904.28
904.29
904.33
904.30
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC to EN 60947-5-2.
The instruments are to be protected against strong electromagnetic fields.
Adjusting the set pointers
The setting of the set points is achieved using the adjustment lock in the window with the aid of the adjustment key (part of the scope of delivery; found in
standard instruments on the side of the terminal box).
Set pointer
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
Adjustment lock
removable
adjustment key
The set pointers for the limit switches are freely adjustable over the full scale
range. For reasons of switching accuracy and long life of the mechanical
measuring systems, the switch points should be between 10 % and 90 % of the
measuring span.
11
GB
7. Maintenance and cleaning / 8. Dismounting and disposal

The indicator and switching function should be checked once or twice every
year. The instrument must be disconnected from the process to check with a
pressure or temperature testing device.
Repairs must only be carried out by the manufacturer or appropriately qualified
skilled personnel.
7.2 Cleaning
CAUTION!
Before cleaning, correctly disconnect the measuring
instrument from the pressure supply, switch it off and
disconnect it from the mains.
Clean the instrument with a moist cloth.
Electrical connections must not come into contact with
moisture.
It must be ensured that all the parts are dry before the power
isswitched on again.
Wash or clean the dismounted measuring instrument before
returning it, in order to protect personnel and the environment

from exposure to residual media.
8. Dismounting and disposal

WARNING!
Residual media in dismounted measuring instruments can result
in a risk to persons, the environment and equipment.
Take sufficient precautionary measures.
8.1 Dismounting
Only disconnect the measuring instrument once the system has been
depressurised!
8.2 Disposal
Incorrect disposal can put the environment at risk. Dispose of instrument
components and packaging materials in an environmentally compatible way and
in accordance with the country-specific waste disposal regulations.
12
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
7.1 Maintenance
The instruments are maintenance-free.
%RPEKI
.RQIRUPLWlWVHUNOlUXQJ
'HFODUDWLRQRI&RQIRUPLW\
5LFKWOLQLH(*$7(;

:LUHUNOlUHQLQDOOHLQLJHU9HUDQWZRUWXQJGDVV
QDFKVWHKHQGJHQDQQWH3URGXNWH'UXFNPHVVJHUlWH
PLW.DSVHOIHGHUJHPlJOWLJHP'DWHQEODWWPLWGHU
5LFKWOLQLHEHUHLQVWLPPHQXQGGHP
.RQIRUPLWlWVEHZHUWXQJVYHUIDKUHQ
'LUHFWLYH(&$7(;

:HGHFODUHXQGHURXUVROHUHVSRQVLELOLW\WKDWWKH
SURGXFWVPHQWLRQHGEHORZSUHVVXUHJDXJHVZLWK
FDSVXOHHOHPHQWDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFXUUHQWGDWDVKHHW
FRUUHVSRQGZLWKWKHGLUHFWLYHDQGZHUHVXEMHFWHGWR
WKHFRQIRUPLW\DVVHVVPHQWSURFHGXUH
,QWHUQH)HUWLJXQJVNRQWUROOH
,QWHUQDO&RQWURORI3URGXFWLRQ

XQWHU]RJHQZXUGHQ

:,.$7\SHQ:,.$PRGHOV

'DWHQEOlWWHUGDWDVKHHWV
;;;;

'LH8QWHUODJHQZHUGHQDXIEHZDKUW
XQWHUGHU$NWHQQXPPHU
EHLGHUEHQDQQWHQ6WHOOH
303030
7h9125'&(57
$P7h9
'+DQQRYHU
7h9125'&(57
$P7h9
'+DQQRYHU
'LH*HUlWHZHUGHQJHNHQQ]HLFKQHWPLW

7KHJDXJHVDUHPDUNHGZLWK
7KHGRVVLHULVUHWDLQHG
XQGHUILOHQU
DWWKHQRWLILHGERG\

,,*'F

$QJHZDQGWH1RUPHQ
(1*UXQGODJHQXQG$QIRUGHUXQJHQ
(16FKXW]GXUFKNRQVWUXNWLYH6LFKHUKHLWF

'LHHLQJHEDXWHQ*UHQ]VLJQDOJHEHUVLQG(*
EDXPXVWHUJHSUIW'LH1XPPHUQGHU3UIEHVFKHL
QLJXQJHQXQGGLH.HQQ]HLFKQXQJ

$SSOLHGVWDQGDUGV
(1%DVLFPHWKRGDQGUHTXLUHPHQWV
(13URWHFWLRQE\FRQVWUXFWLRQDOVDIHW\F

7KHEXLOWLQDODUPFRQWDFWVDUH(&W\SHFHUWLILHG
1XPEHUVRIFHUWLILFDWHVDQGPDUNLQJ
37%$7(;;E]ZUHVS37%$7(;;

XQGDQG
=(/0$7(;;
,,*(([LD,,&7
,,'([LD'7&

+LW]NLUFK

3HWHU%DUPHWWOHU
/HLWHU7HFKQLN
7HFKQLFDO0DQDJHU

'DQLHO7VFKRSS
/HLWHU4XDOLWlWVVLFKHUXQJ
4XDOLW\$VVXUDQFH0DQDJHU
;-/%&IXVMIFWERPIMXYRK(VYGOQIWWKIVXI8]TQMXREGL%8)<
+&(*

:,.$$OH[DQGHU:LHJDQG*PE+ &R.*
0$120(7(5$*,QGXVWULHVWU&++LW]NLUFK
Appendix 1:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
13
Appendix 1:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
14
Appendix 1:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
15
Appendix 2:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
16
Appendix 2:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
17
Appendix 2:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
18
Appendix 2:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
19
Appendix 3:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
20
Appendix 3:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
21
Appendix 3:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
22
Appendix 3:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
23
Appendix 3:
2371673.05 05/2014 GB/D/F/E
GB
24
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung

Mounting and operating instruction
Montage et mode demploi
KEMA 01ATEX1053 X
Bitte zur knftigen Verwendung aufbewahren
Please retain for future usage
Veuillez conserver pour un usage futur
Schwimmer Magnetschalter
Magnetic float switches
Rgulateurs de Niveau Flotteur Sries 60 et 80
MB6080EX.doc
Rev. 5 31.03.2008
MB6080EX.doc.
English
Symbol legend
The following symbols are used in these operating instructions:
Warning
Instructions on correct installation and proper operation of the
Float Switch 60-80 . Failing to comply with these instructions
can lead to malfunction of or damage to the switch.
Precaution
Instructions which must be complied with to avoid injury or
property damage or loss of the type permit.
Information
Facts and information concerning proper operation of the Float
Switch 60-80
Instructions for electrical installation

Information on proper electrical installation.
Safety information
Read these instructions before installing the Float Switches 60-80 and putting
then into operation.
These instructions are intended for the specialists in charge of mounting, installation and setup.
Comply with the relevant safety regulations when using the equipment.
Unauthorized access and impermissible use of the equipment will result in the loss of guarantee
and liability protection.
Measures must be taken to prevent risks to persons and property in the event of a defect in the
Float Switches 60-80 .
Do not install in ferromagnetic surroundings or the immediate vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields.
(minimum distance: 1 m).
Float Switches 60-80 must not be exposed to heavy mechanical loads.
Comply with the maximum current and voltage values for intrinsically safe operation as specified in
the installation and operating instructions.
MB6080EX.doc
11 / 31
Danger!
There is a risk of poisoning or suffocation when working in containers. Relevant
personal protection measures (e.g. respiratory devices, protective clothing, etc.)
must be taken before work is carried out.
Danger, risk of explosion!
An explosive atmosphere may develop in a container. Measures must be taken to prevent
sparking. Work in such areas must be done by qualified personnel in accordance with the
relevant safety regulations and guidelines.
Application and field of use

An approval has been issued for the Float Switches 60-80 for use as explosion-protected
equipment within the scope of application defined by EU Guideline 94/9/EU in hazardous areas.
They comply with the specifications regulating use of electrical equipment in explosion risk areas.
The technical data in these operating instructions must be complied with.
Ignition protection type
II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T3...T6

II 2 D T 80 C IP6X
Float and Guide tube, zone 0
Structure and functional description

The Float Switches 60-80 are used to monitor filling levels in containers holding liquid
mediums. These mediums must not contain heavy soiling or coarse suspended matter must not
show a tendency to crystallize out.
KSR Magnetic Float Switches are used to control distinct levels of a liquid. They are based on the
float principle with individual contacts for every level to be monitored.
A float with a built-in magnetic system actuates a small reed contact through the wall of the guide
tube. Thus the switching operation is without direct contact to the liquid, free of wear and tear, and
does not require any power supply.
KSR Magnetic Float Switches are available with multiple switch points.
Removal of transport packaging and transport safety devices

Remove the Float Switch carefully from the transport packaging.
See the instructions on the shipping packaging; remove all transport safety devices before
removing the Float Switch.
Never forcibly remove the Float Switch from the packaging by taking hold of the guide tube!
Before installing the Float Switch, the float safety bands must be removed. Make sure all
packaging components have been removed and that the float moves freely on the guide tube.
12 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Installation in the container

The Float Switches are installed in the container using flanges or mounting plugs. (See
the type designation on the product for the specific design of your Float Switch)
Prior to installation, make sure the installation opening in the container agrees in size and
dimensions with the installation option of the Float Switch.
Depending on the design of the Float Switches 60-80,
the guide tube is inserted into the container from the
outside. Installation should be vertical. To ensure proper
functioning, the angle of installation must not deviate
exceed 30 from the vertical position.
1
2
3
4
The guide tube of the Float Switches 60-80 is inserted

into the container from the outside through the installation
opening. It is then fixed by tightening the thread or the
screws for flanged versions.
In Float Switches featuring a mounting plug,

the thread must be screwed in for the entire
length of the thread.
Float Switches featuring flanges must be
installed using suitable bolts, washers and nuts.
Please comply with the maximum torque ratings of the
bolts / screws used when tightening them down.
Use suitable gaskets. Make sure the gasket material is
resistant to the medium and its vapours as well as to the
expected temperature and pressure loads.
Designs, where the floats diameter is lager then the core
opening must be installed with the float removed form the
guide tube.
max. 30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Terminal Box
Cable gland
Process Connection
Gasket
Guide tube
Float
Teflon washer
Set collar or Tension
clamp
Procedure:
Fig. Float Switch
1. Mark the upper side of the float (e.g. with "top")
2. Mark position of the set collar to be removed
3. Remove set collars and teflon washer
4. Remove floats
5. Install Float Switch 60-80
6. Position the floats, set collars and teflon washer from inside the container. Mind the marked
positions!
The purpose of the teflon washer is to avoid potential ignition sparking if the
float should fall against the set collar. Operating the equipment without teflon
washer is not permitted.
MB6080EX.doc
13 / 31
Maximum length of guide tubes

In containers in which turbulences can be expected, Float Switch over 3,000 mm long
must also be secured so as to prevent the Guide tube from bending.
This can be achieved, for instance, with a receiving sleeve at the bottom of the
container.
Electrical connection
Float Switches 60-80 must only be operated on certified intrinsically safe control
circuits of ignition protection type EEx ia.
Float Switches 60... - 80...
EEx ia
The electrical data on the type plate and the additional regulations governing intrinsically safe
circuits must be complied with. This work must be done by trained specialist personnel.
The electrical connection of the Float Switches 60-80 is realized with integrated terminals.
See the connection diagram inside the terminal box or included with the equipment, or the
information in catalogue 1003- for the applicable connection scheme.
Selecting the connection cable

The connection cable must be selected as suitable for the expected ambient
conditions (temperature, aggressive atmosphere, weathering, etc.).
The number of wires depends on the number of switching points.
wires
switching point
1
2
3
4
Closing /
Change over
Opening
3
4
5
7
7
10
9
13
See the relevant connection scheme in each case.

The connection is to be done with cable marked in light blue. The diameter of the connection cable
must be within the clamp range of the cable gland. If other cable diameters are used, moisture and
dust may penetrate into the equipment.
Use of single bunched conductors is not permissible!
Conduction capacity and inductance

When determining the required cable length, the maximum permissible inductances and
capacities of the connected intrinsically safe control device must be taken into account.
These values should not be exceeded by the connection cable.
14 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Cable Connection
1. The connection cable must be laid in accordance with the applicable regulations applying to
installation of intrinsically safe circuits
2. Remove the lid of the terminal box
3. Insert the cable through the cable gland collet into the terminal box
4. Remove jacketing and expose strands
5. Attach terminal lugs to the strands
6. Insert the wires into the row terminals as per diagram and fasten them down
7. Replace and fasten down the terminal box lid
Use the appropriate connection scheme
Equipotential bonding and PE connection

There is at least one PE connection terminal for connection of a PE conductor in the
terminal box of the Float Switch 60-80.
In the case of Float Switches without external ground terminals, an electrical connection must be
established between the mounting plug and the container during installation. If there is a ground
terminal, the equipotential bonding or PE connection can be realized by this means.
Maintenance
Float Switches 60-80 function free of maintenance if used properly. However, they must be
subjected to a visual check within the framework of regular inspection, including a container
pressure test.
MB6080EX.doc
15 / 31
Functional test
The functional test serves to determine the proper function of the reed contacts.
Functional test prior to installation in the container
Before the Float Switch is installed, it can be checked with a continuity checker or an ohmmeter.
1. Connect the wires of the switch
point to be tested to the
continuity checker or ohmmeter.
2. Raise float and move it up to the
switch point position. Depending
on the switching function,
continuity or no continuity will be
indicated.
3. Move float back to initial
position. The switching function
must be reversed.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each
switching point.
L1
L2
Float raised
Float at initial
position
Important:
The switching point dimensions L
refer to the gasket area and the
distance to the middle of the float.
Functional test of installed Float Switch
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The functionality of installed Float Switches can only be tested from the inside of the container
It is recommended to de-install the Float Switch for the functional test
Disconnect electrical connections
De-install Float Switch
Functional test as per chapter "Prior to installation in container"
Install Float Switch in the container
Re-establish electrical connection as per the relevant connection scheme
Functional testing may trigger unintended reactions in subsequent control
circuits. Risk of property damage or personnel injuries.
16 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Error search
The following table lists the most frequent causes of error and the necessary
countermeasures
Error
Cause
Countermeasure
Compare
with
False terminal connection
connection diagram
Insulation
Check terminals
Set
collars
out
of
position
No switching
or replaced incorrectly Control position of set
function or
after the guide tube is collar
undefined
removed
Reed contact defective
due
to
mechanical Return to factory
vibrations
Float installed incorrectly Turn float around
False switching
False
ordering Please contact the
point dimensions
information
factory
Reworking
of
Thread
or
flange
container
dimensions
of
Float
Reworking of Float
Float Switch cannot Switch do not agree
Switch at factory
be attached at the
Reworking of thread
intended position on Thread of mounting plug
or replacement of
the container
on container defective
mounting plug
Bolt threading on the
Send back to factory
Float Switch defective
Please give us a call in case of any difficulties. We will do everything we can to
provide you with the required advice and help.
Technical data
Summary electrical data on Float Switch variants with permit
Basic
type
Code1
Code2
60
..
G..
..
L...
/..
...
80
..
DN..PN..
..
L...
/..
...
MB6080EX.doc
Code3 Code4 Code5 Code6
Umax /
Imax
Tmax
36V /
100mA
36V /
100mA
180C
180C
Ignition
protection
type
EEx ia IIC
T3...T6
EEx ia IIC
T3...T6
17 / 31
Temperatures - Float Switch 60-80

Temperature
class
Maximum surface
temperature
T3
T4
T5
T6
200C
135C
100C
85C
Maximum
Maximum ambient
process temperature on
temperature
terminal box
180C
60C
130C
60C
95C
60C
80C
60C
Category 2D Dust maximum

surface temperature for use in
area Zone 21
T +80C*
*The maximum ambient temperature of the equipment is also dependant from the operating temperature of the fluid and
the ambient temperature and has to be below the ignition temperature.
Type Code Float Switch 60-80

Type Code Float
Code 1
V
Code 2 Code 3 Code 4

52
A
...
Code 4
Float ID in mm
38
*a Only for 120 Float with
Float ID 38mm
Code 3
magnet system
R = radial
A = Axial
Code 2
Float OD in mm
See type code material
Old float type code

Basic type
Material
Version
44
S
K
S
52
62
S
A
80
S
B23
83
S
B
98
S
C
105
S
D
120
S
F
120*a
S
F38
200
S
200
300
S
300
* all dimensions in mm
Code 1
Material
V
Stainless steel
T
Titanium
HC
Hastelloy HC
HB
Hastelloy HB
18 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Type Code Float Switch

Basic type Code 1 Code 2
Code 3
Code 4
Code 5
Code 6
Code 7
60
W90/80
SU
L.../12
V52A...
F / V / .../....
Code 8
Code 8:
Zulassungen *2
EX ATEX Zulassung
EX DNV ATEX und DNV
EX GL ATEX und GL
Code 7:
Float
see Type Code Float
Code 6:
L.../...= Guide tube length max. / Guide tube - OD
Code 5:
Contact separation / NAMUR / * Optional code (The number of
letters in the code corresponds to the number of contacts)
S Closing
on rising level
Opening
on rising level
U Contact separation
on rising level
.../ N
acc. to NAMUR DIN EN 60947-5-6 *
*(only if Option available)
Code 4:
Guide tube material
V = Edelstahl ; HB = Hastelloy B ; HC = Hastelloy C ; T = Titan
Code 3
W.../... Winkelangabe/Winkelnge (nur wenn Option vorhanden)
Code 2
Process connection / Material / nominal size (pressure rating )/ Flange face
Code 1:
A
APL
AV
AV6
AV7
AV9
Flange
FV/.../.../..
Triclamp
FCV...
Dairy fitting
acc. to DIN
11851
Mounting
thread
Sanitary
nozzle
Material:
.../V/... =
.../HB/... =
.../HC/... =
.../T/... =
MRV...
RV...
ISV
F/ Material/ (numerical value nominal size.../ pressure rating...)/ Flange face

DN50 - DN250 or Ansi 1 6 / PN6 - PN64 or 150lbs - 600lbs
C/ Material / (numerical value nominal size.../ pressure rating...)
DN10 - DN100; 1-4 Zol
MR/ Material / (numerical value nominal size.../ pressure rating...)
DN10 - DN150
R/ Material / size
G1 " - G3 "
IS / Material (max. 4 bar)
(Sanitary nozzle / Ingold nozzle)
Stainless steel
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Titanium
= Version with terminal box Aluminium

= Version with terminal box Polyester
= Version with terminal box Stainless steel
Basic type
60
MB6080EX.doc
19 / 31
Float Switchnominal pressure

Process connection
Basic type 80
Basic type 60
Nominal pressure in bar
PN 6
6 bar
PN 16
16 bar
PN 40
40 bar
PN 64
64 bar
150 lbs
15 bar (at max 148C)
300 lbs
600 lbs
Mounting
Thread
G1 G3
Flange
Nominal pressure in bar
In cases of maximum bolt threading

length and suitable gaskets at the
process connection, the float
pressure specification applies.*
* When float ST/0.8 is used, special
mounting threads have to be used
in connection with a nominal
pressure of 64 bar.
If the pressure specifications for the process connection (e.g. flange) and float differ, the lowest
pressure figure is then the nominal pressure of the Float Switch.
KSR float
Type
Type
old
Max.
operating
pressure
Type
Type
old
[bar]
V44A
SVK
Max.
operating
pressure
Type
Type
old
[bar]
Max.
operating
pressure
[bar]
16
T83A
STB
25
HB44A
SHBK
16
V52A
SV
40
T80A
STB23
25
HB52A
SHB
40
V62A
SVA
32
T98A
STC
25
HB62A
SHBA
32
V83A
SVB
25
T105A
STD
25
HB83A
SHBB
25
V80A
SVB23
25
T120A
STF
25
HB80A
SHBB23
25
V98A
SVC
25
HC44A
SHCK
16
HB98A
SHBC
25
V105A
SVD
25
HC52A
SHC
40
HB105A
SHBD
25
V120A
SVF23
25
HC62A
SHCA
32
HB120A
SHBF23
25
V120A/38 SVF38
25
HC83A
SHCB
25
HB120A/38 SHBF38
25
V200A
SV200
16
HC80A
SHCB23
25
HB200A
16
V300A
SV300
16
HC98A
SHCC
25
T44A
STK
16
HC105A
SHCD
25
T52A
ST
25
HC120A
SHCF23
25
T52A/0,6
ST/0,6
40
HC120A/38 SHCF38
25
T52A/0,8
ST/0,8
40
HC200A
16
T62A
STA
25
20 / 31
SHC200
SHB200
MB6080EX.doc
Franais
Lgende
Les symboles suivants sont utiliss dans ce mode demploi:
Avertissement
Instructions pour un montage correct et une mise en service
conforme des rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 Une
non-observation de ces instructions peut conduire des erreurs
de fonctionnement ou des dtriorations.
Danger - Prcautions
Instructions dont la non-observation peut conduire des dgts
corporels ou matriels.
Information
Indications et informations pour une utilisation approprie des
rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80
Instructions pour linstallation lectrique

Informations pour une installation lectrique approprie.
Instructions relatives la scurit

Veuillez lire ces instructions avant l'installation et la mise en service des rgulateurs
de niveau type 60 resp. 80
Ces instructions sont destines un personnel qualifi qui va raliser les travaux de montage et
d'installation.
Veuillez respecter les rgles de scurit approprie lors de linstallation.
Une intervention non autorise et une utilisation interdite entranent la perte de la garantie et de la
possibilit de recours des rclamations.
Veuillez prendre les mesures ncessaires, en cas de panne sur les rgulateurs de niveau type
60 resp. 80, pour viter des risques pour le personnel et le matriel.
Veuillez ne pas installer les rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 proximit de puissants
champs lectro-magntiques (1 m de distance minimum).
Les rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 ne doivent pas subir de contraintes mcaniques
importantes.
Les valeurs lectriques maxi indiques dans le mode demplo et appropries lutilisation en
scurit intrinsque doivent tre respectes.
MB6080EX.doc
21 / 31
Danger!
Lors de travaux dans un rservoir, il existe un danger d'empoisonnement ou de
suffoquement. Ces travaux ne peuvent tre entrepris qu'en application de
mesures de scurit adaptes aux personnes (par exemple port de masque
respiratoire, vtements de protection ou quivalent).
Attention, danger d'explosion!
Il peut exister un risque de formation d'atmosphre explosive dans un rservoir. Il faut alors
prendre les mesures ncessaires afin dviter la formation d'tincelle. Seulement un
personnel qualifi et form aux exigences relatives aux directives de scurit pourra
intervenir dans de telles zones.
Utilisation et domaine d'application

Les rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 sont des appareils protgs contre les risques
dexplosions cconformment la directive europenne 94/9/CE et, ce titre, ils sont homologus
pour l'installation dans des zones explosives.
Ils rpondent aux exigences des appareils lectriques pour zones explosives.
Les caractristiques techniques donnes dans ce mode demploi doivent tre respectes.
Type de protection:
II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T3...T6

II 2 D T 80 C IP6X
Flotteur et tube de guidage zone 0
Principe et description de fonctionnement

Les rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 servent contrler le niveau des liquides dans les
rservoirs. Ces liquides ne doivent pas contenir de particules solides et ne doivent pas tre enclins
la cristallisation.
Les rgulateurs de niveau travaillent selon le principe du flotteur avec transmission magntique. A
l'intrieur du tube de guidage, se trouvent un ou plusieurs interrupteurs lame souple (contacts
sous gaz inerte). Sur le tube de guidage sont monts un ou plusieurs flotteurs. Leur position est
fonction du niveau du liquide contrler. Un aimant permanent est mont l'intrieur de ces
flotteurs. Ds que le champ magntique atteint le domaine d'action de linterrupteur lame souple,
ce dernier est actionn. Le nombre et la position des flotteurs dpend du nombre de contacts, de
leur fonction ainsi que de leur position. Veuillez consulter la grille de code pour les diffrentes
variantes.
Enlvement des emballages et des accessoires de fixation ncessaires au transport

Les rgulateurs de niveau doivent tre dballs avec prcaution.
Veuillez tenir compte des instructions figurant sur l'emballage et enlever tous les accessoires de
fixation avant de sortir le rgulateur de son emballage.
Ne jamais forcer sur le tube de guidage pour extraire l'appareil de son emballage!
Avant le montage du rgulateur de niveau, veuillez ter les bandes de fixation des flotteurs.
Assurez-vous que toutes les fixations et emballages ncessaires au transport ont bien t enlevs
et que le flotteur coulisse librement sur le tube de guidage.
22 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Installation dans le rservoir

Selon le modle, les rgulateurs de niveau sont monts dans le rservoir par
l'intermdiaire d'une bride ou d'un bouchon filet (veuillez vous rfrer la plaque
identificatrice du rgulateur de niveau).
Avant le montage, veuillez vous assurer que l'ouverture prvue pour le montage ainsi que le mode
de fixation correspondent bien l'encombrement et aux dimensions du rgulateur de niveau.
Le montage se fait, quel que soit le modle de rgulateur
de niveau type 60 resp. 80, partir de l'extrieur du
rservoir. Les rgulateurs doivent tre monts en position
verticale, + ou - 30 afin d'assurer un bon fonctionnement.
1
2
3
4
Le tube de guidage des rgulateurs de niveau type 60

resp. 80 doit tre introduit par l'ouverture prvue du
rservoir. La fixation se fait par serrage du bouchon filet,
le cas chant des vis pour les excutions avec bride.
Les rgulateurs de niveau avec bouchon filet

sont visser sur toute la hauteur du filetage.
Les rgulateurs de niveau avec bride sont
fixer avec les vis, rondelles et crous adapts.
Veuillez respecter la correcte force de serrage des
croux lors du vissage.
Veuillez utiliser des joints dtanchit adapts. Il est
ncessaire de s'assurer que ces joints rsistent
durablement au fluide et ses vapeurs, ainsi qu' la
temprature et la pression de service.
Pour les excutions dont le diamtre du flotteur est
suprieur celui de l'ouverture du rservoir, il est
ncessaire de dmonter le flotteur avant le montage de
l'appareil.
8 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Botier de raccordement
max. 30
Presse toupe
Bouchon filet
Joint
Tube de guidage
Flotteur
Rondelle tflon
Bague d'arrt ou collier de
serrage
Abb. Schwimmer-Magnetschalter...
Procdure:
1. Marquer la partie suprieure du flotteur (par exemple "haut")
2. Marquer la position des bagues d'arrt
3. Dmonter les bagues d'arrt et rondelles de protection
4. Dmonter le flotteur
5. Monter le rgulateur de niveau type 60 resp. 80 dans louverture du rservoir
6. Remonter (par trou d'homme) le flotteur, les bagues d'arrt et rondelles en Tflon. Respecter le
marquage!
Les rondelles de protection servent viter de potentielles tincelles en cas de
heurt du flotteur contre la bague d'arrt. Un fonctionnement sans rondelles de
protection n'est pas autoris.
MB6080EX.doc
23 / 31
Longueur maximale des tubes de guidage

Dans les rservoirs avec risque de turbulences, et pour des rgulateurs de niveau de
longueur suprieure 3000 mm, il faudra prvoir une fixation au fond du rservoir afin
dviter une dformation du tube de guidage.
Raccordement lectrique
Les rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 peuvent uniquement tre raccords
des circuits certifis en scurit intrinsque ayant un type de protection EEx ia.
Rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80
EEx ia
Veuillez respecter les caractristiques lectriques apposes sur la plaque identificatrice ainsi que
les instructions complmentaires concernant les circuits lectriques de scurit intrinsque. Ces
appareils pourront uniquement tre installs par un personnel qualifi.
Le raccordement lectrique des rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80 se fait par
l'intermdiaire des bornes de connexion intgres.
Le schma de connexion de l'appareil se trouve, soit dans le botier de raccordement, soit sur le
schma de raccordement joint l'appareil, soit dans le catalogue 1003-
Choix du cble de raccordement

Le choix du cble de raccordement doit tenir compte de l'environnement (temprature,
atmosphre agressive, conditions mtorologiques).
Le nombre de conducteurs dpend du nombre de contacts.
contacts
conducteurs
fermeture par niveau montant /
ouverture par niveau montant
1
2
3
4
3
5
7
9
nombre de lettres indique le

nombre de contacts
4
7
10
13
Veuillez respecter le schma de raccordement

Le raccordement doit se faire avec un cble de couleur bleu clair. Le diamtre du cble de
raccordement doit tre adapt la taille du presse-toupe afin d'viter tout risque de pntration
d'humidit et poussire lintrieur du botier.
L'utilisation de conducteurs simples est interdite.
Charges capacitive et inductive

La longueur du cble de raccordement doit tenir compte des charges inductives et
capacitives maxi du relais scurit intrinsque raccord au circuit. Ces valeurs ne
doivent en aucun cas tre dpasses.
24 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Raccordement du cble
1. Utiliser un cble de raccordement conforme aux prescriptions en vigueur relatives l'installation

de circuits lectriques en scurit intrinsque.
2. Enlever le couvercle du botier de raccordement.
3. Introduire le cble de raccordement dans le botier par le presse-toupe.
4. Dnuder le cble et les conducteurs.
5. Apposer des terminaisons sur les conducteurs.
6. Insrer selon le schma de connexion les fils conducteurs dans les bornes et les fixer.
7. Remettre le couvercle du botier et le fixer.
Veuillez respecter les schmas de connexion
Echange quipotentiel et raccordement la terre

Dans le botier de raccordement des rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80, il y a
au moins une borne de raccordement la terre pour connexion du fils conducteur
"terre". Pour les rgulateurs de niveau sans borne extrieure de mise la terre, il faut,
lors de l'installation, raliser une connexion lectrique au rservoir par le bouchon filet. En cas
d'existence d'une borne de mise la terre, l'change quipotentiel pourra se faire par celle-ci.
Entretien
Les rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80, utiliss conformment aux instructions, ne
ncessitent pas d'entretien. Dans le cadre des rvisions de routine ou dun test de pression
hydrostatique du rservoir, ils devront toutefois tre soumis un contrle visuel.
MB6080EX.doc
25 / 31
Test de fonctionnement
Le test de fonctionnement sert constater le bon fonctionnement des interrupteurs
lame souple.
Test de fonctionnement avant installation dans le rservoir
On peut contrler le rgulateur de niveau avant son installation dans le rservoir l'aide d'un
appareil de test de continuit lectrique ou d'un ohmmtre.
1. Raccorder l'ohmmtre les fils

du contact contrler.
2. Soulever le flotteur jusqu' la
hauteur de ce contact qui
commutera ou non selon sa
fonction lectrique.
3. Remettre le flotteur dans sa
position initiale. La fonction du
contact doit alors s'inverser.
4. Rpter les points 1 3 pour
chaque contact.
L1
L2
flotteur au
travail
flotteur au repos
Remarque:
Les positions L des points de
contact se rfrent au plan du joint
dtanchit et au milieu du flotteur.
Test de fonctionnement aprs installation dans le rservoir.

1. Le test de fonctionnement sur un rgulateur de niveau dj mont ne peut s'effectuer que de
l'intrieur du rservoir.
2. Il est conseill de dmonter le rgulateur de niveau et d'effectuer le test sur l'appareil dmont.
3. Dconnecter les raccordements lectriques.
4. Dmonter le rgulateur de niveau.
5. Effectuer le test de fonctionnement selon le chapitre prcdent "Test de fonctionnement avant
l'installation dans le rservoir".
6. Remonter le rgulateur de niveau dans le rservoir.
7. Rtablir le raccordement lectrique selon le schma de raccordement.
Lors du test de fonctionnement, des ractions involontaires dans le sytme de
contrle peuvent survenir. Risque de dgts matriels ou corporels.
26 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Recherche d'erreurs
Dans le tableau ci-dessous, se trouvent les causes d'erreurs les plus
frquentes et les mesures prendre.
Erreurs
Origine
Raccordement une
mauvaise borne
Fil non dnud
Pas de seuil de Bague d'arrt dplaces
contact ou seuil de ou mal remontes lors
contact mal dfini
d'un dmontage
Interrupteur
lame
souple dtrior suite
un choc mcanique
Flotteur mal mont
Position du contact
Erreur de donne lors de
incorrecte
la commande
Mesures
Voir
schma
de
raccordement
Contrler les bornes
Contrler la position
des bagues d'arrt
Retour l'usine
Retourner le flotteur
Consulter le fabricant
Modification
de
du
Dimensions du bouchon louverture
ou de la bride ne rservoir
Impossibilit
de correspondent pas
Modification
du
monter le rgulateur
rgulateur l'usine
de niveau dans le
Rusinage du filetage
Filetage du manchon du
rservoir
ou remplacement du
rservoir dfectueux
manchon
Filetage du rgulateur
Retour l'usine
dfectueux
Nous sommes votre entire disposition pour tout renseignement utile.
N'hsitez pas nous appeler.
Caractristiques techniques
Sommaire des caractristiques techniques des diffrentes variantes de
rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80
Type de
base
60
G..
Code
3
..
Code
4
L...
Code
5
/..
Code
6
...
DN..PN..
..
L...
/..
...
Code 1
Code 2
..
..
80
MB6080EX.doc
U max /
T max
I max
36V /
180C
100mA
36V /
180C
100mA
Type de
protection
EEx ia IIC
T3...T6
EEx ia IIC
T3...T6
27 / 31
Tempratures - Rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80

Classe de
temprature
Temp. maxi de
surface
Temp. maxi
du process
Temp. ambiente
maxi au niveau du
botier
T3
T4
T5
T6
200C
135C
100C
85C
180C
130C
95C
80C
60C
60C
60C
60C
Catgorie 2D Poussire
temprature maximale de
surface pour utilisation en
zone 21
T +80C*
*La temprature maximale de surface de l'appareil dpend aussi de la temprature de service du fluide et de la
temprature ambiante. Elle doit rester en de de la temprature d'auto-inflammation.
Grille de code des rgulateurs de niveau 60... - 80...

Grille de code des flotteurs
Code 1
V
Code 2 Code 3 Code 4

52
A
...
Code 4
Diamtre interne en mm
38
*a Only for 120 Float with
Diamtre interne du flotteur 38mm
Code 3
magnet system
R = radial
A = Axial
Code 2
Flotteur sphrique
Old float type code
Sans code
Matriau
K
44
S
S
52
62
S
80
S
83
S
98
S
105
S
120
S
120*a
S
200
S
300
S
* all dimensions in mm
See type code material
Type de base
A
B23
B
C
D
F
F38
200
300
Code 1
Matriau du flotteur
V
Flotteur en acier inoxydable
T
Flotteur en titane
HC
Flotteur en Hastelloy C
HB
Flotteur en Hastelloy D
28 / 31
MB6080EX.doc
Grille de code des rgulateurs de niveau type 60 resp. 80

Type de
base
Code 1
Code 2
Code 3
Code 4
Code 5
Code 6
Code 7
60
F / V / .../....
W90/80
SU
L.../12
V52A...
Code 8
Code 8:
Zulassungen *2
EX ATEX Zulassung
EX DNV ATEX und DNV
EX GL ATEX und GL
Code 7:
code des flotteurs
Voir grille de code des flotteurs
Code 6:
L.../...= Longueur du tube de guidage /
du tube en mm
Code 5:
Kontaktfunktion / Namurbeschaltung / *Zusatzcode (Le nombre de
lettres indique le nombre de contacts)
S fermeture par niveau montant
ouverture par niveau montant
U nombre de lettres indique le nombre de contacts
.../ N
acc. to NAMUR DIN EN 60947-5-6 *
*(only if Option available)
Code 4:
Matriau du tube de guidage
V = Acier inoxydable, HB = Hastelloy B, HC = Hastelloy C, T = Titane
Code 3
W.../... Winkelangabe/Winkelnge (nur wenn Option vorhanden)
Code 2
Prozessanschluss: Werkstoff / Gre/ Druck / Flansch Dichtflche
Code 1:
A
APL
AV
AV6
AV7
AV9
Flansche
FV/.../.../..
Triclamp
FCV...
Milchrohrverschraubung
Einschraubgewinde
INGOLD
Stutzen
Werkstoff:
.../V/... =
.../HB/... =
.../HC/... =
.../T/... =
MRV...
RV...
ISV
F/ Werkstoff/ (Zahlenwert Gre.../Druck...)/ Dichtflche

DN50 DN250 bzw. Ansi 1 6 / PN6 PN64 bzw. 150lbs
600lbs
FV130 = (KSR Ronde PN40)
FC/ Werkstoff/ (Zahlenwert Gre...)
DN10 DN100; 1-4 Zol
MR/ Werkstoff/ (Zahlenwert Gre...)
DN10 DN150
R/ Werkstoff/ (Zahlenwert Gre...)
G1 G3
IS / WERKSTOFF (max. 4 bar)
Edelstahl
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Titan
= Ausfhrung mit Aluminiumgehuse

= Ausfhrung mit Polyestergehuse
= Ausfhrung mit Edelstahlgehuse
Type de base:
60
MB6080EX.doc
29 / 31
Pression nominale des rgulateurs de niveau

Raccordement process
Type de base 80
Type de base 60
Bride
Pression nominale en bar
PN 6
6 bar
PN 16
16 bar
PN 40
40 bar
PN 64
64 bar
150 lbs
15 bar ( temp. max 148C)
300 lbs
600 lbs
Bouchon
G1 G3
Pression nominale en bar

Avec une longueur maxi de filetage
et un joint dtanchit adapt au
bouchon, la pression nominale du
flotteur est applicable.*
* En cas d'utilisation du flotteur
ST/0,8 une pression nominale de
64 bar, il faudra utiliser des
bouchons spciaux.
Si les indications de pression du raccordement process (par exemple de la bride) diffrent de celles du
flotteur, la valeur la plus basse est la pression nominale du rgulateur de niveau.
Flotteurs KSR
Type
V44A
Type Pression
vieux de service
maxi [bar]
SVK
Type
Type Pression
vieux de service
maxi [bar]
Type
16
T83A
STB
25
HB44A
Type Pression
vieux de service
maxi [bar]
SHBK
16
V52A
SV
40
T80A
STB23
25
HB52A
SHB
40
V62A
SVA
32
T98A
STC
25
HB62A
SHBA
32
V83A
SVB
25
T105A
STD
25
HB83A
SHBB
25
V80A
SVB23
25
T120A
STF
25
HB80A
SHBB23
25
V98A
SVC
25
HC44A
SHCK
16
HB98A
SHBC
25
V105A
SVD
25
HC52A
SHC
40
HB105A
SHBD
25
V120A
SVF23
25
HC62A
SHCA
32
HB120A
SHBF23
25
V120A/38 SVF38
25
HC83A
SHCB
25
HB120A/38 SHBF38
25
V200A
SV200
16
HC80A
SHCB23
25
HB200A
16
V300A
SV300
16
HC98A
SHCC
25
T44A
STK
16
HC105A
SHCD
25
T52A
ST
25
HC120A
SHCF23
25
T52A/0,6
ST/0,6
40
HC120A/38 SHCF38
25
T52A/0,8
ST/0,8
40
HC200A
16
T62A
STA
25
30 / 31
SHC200
SHB200
MB6080EX.doc
MB6080EX.doc
31 / 31
KSR KUEBLER AG Adressen
KSR KUEBLER Niveau-Messtechnik AG

Heinrich-Kbler-Platz 1
Tel:[+49] 06263 870
http://www.ksr-kuebler.com
DE-69439 Zwingenberg/Neckar
Fax:[+49] 06263/87-99
e-Mail:info@ksr-kuebler.com
KUBLER FRANCE S.A.

10, avenue dAlsace
Tel:[+33] 03 89 75 41 73
FR-68700 Cernay
Fax: [+33] 03 89 75 53 14
e-Mail:ksr-fr@ksr-kuebler.com
KSR KUEBLER Level Measurement & Control Ltd.

Tan Capel, Betws Gwerfil Goch
Tel:[+44] 1490 460 584
Corwen, Denbighshire LL21 9PU, GB

Fax:[+44] 1490 460 477
e-Mail:ksruk@ksr-kuebler.com
KSR H&H Measurement B.V.

Alphenseweg 4-h
Tel:[+31] 13 533 96 88
http://www.h-hm.com
NL-5133 Riel / Niederlande

Fax: [+31] 13 533 19 62
e-Mail: info@h-hm.com
KSR KUEBLER Level Control Products of America Inc.

8349-M Arrowridge Blvd
Tel:[+1] 704 522 7663
http://www.ksr-usa.com
Charlotte, NC 28273 USA

Fax: [+1] 704 522 7616
e-Mail:info@ksr-usa.com
SHANGHAI KSR KUEBLER Automation Instrument Co. LTD

No. 510 Yu Tang Road
Tel:[+86] 21 57745225
Industrial Zone Songjiang Shanghai 201613, P.R. China

Fax: [+86] 21 67741420
e-Mail: china@ksr-kuebler.com
KSR KUEBLER (SINGAPORE) Level Measurement & Control PTE LTD

21 Toh Guan Road East,
Tel: [+65] 6316 7625 6
#09-17 Toh Guan Centre Singapore 608609

Fax.: [+65] 6316 7627
e-Mail:ksr-asia@ksr-kuebler.com
MB6080EX.doc
KEMA Quality B.V.

Utrec hts eweg 310, 6812 AR Arnhem, Die Niederlande
Postfach 9035, 6800 ET Arnhem, Di e Niederl ande
Telefon +31 26 3 56 34 21, Tel efax +31 26 3 52 58 00
AKKREDITIERT DURCH
DEN NIEDERLNDISCHEN
AKKREDITIERUNGSRAT
Hand pump PFH-L
Application:
As delivery pump in central lubrication
systems.
Technical data:
- Subject to modifications -
Delivery capacity:
Delivery pressure at 70 N
1)
manual power :
Temperature range:
Viscosity range:
Weight:
Reservoir capacity:
3,2 cm/stroke
approx. 10 bar
-10 ... +80 C
6,3 ... 2700 cP
2,7 kg
1l
Material:
PTFE (Teflon)
- Sealing:
- Reservoir and
pump casing:
Alu hard coated
- Pump internals,
screwing and
return valve:
stainless steel 1.4571
1)
The delivery pressure depends on the

manual power applied. A pressure
control valve is not incorporated.
Remark on dimensional drawing:

1
2
3
4
5
6
Hand lever
Pressure connection for pipe outside
diameter 6 or 8
Filling sieve mesh width 300m
Filling cap
Reservoir
Discharge screw M10x1
Purchase-designation:
Hand pump
Type
PFH-L
Pressure connection
for:
Pipe-AD 6
Pipe-AD 8
Hand pump PFH-L

101.870
EUGEN WOERNER
GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1661
DE-97866 Wertheim
Hafenstrasse 2
DE-97877 Wertheim
Tel. +49 (0) 9342 803-0 info@woerner.de
Fax.+49 (0) 9342 803-202 www.woerner.de
Leaflet-No.
Replaces No.
Page 1 of 3
0369.09.10 EN
0369.03.10 EN
Spare parts:
22
Item Designation
Purch.-no.
Item Designation
Purch.-no.
Item Designation
800.912-06
10
Cover
101.603-35
19
Lock screw M10x1
800.908-23
11
Split washer 4
807.980-01
20
Suction valve
101.914-65
12
Cheese head M4x10
800.912-02
21
Sealing ring 36x42x1 T
915.100-86
13
Sieve B50
913.300-13
22
14
Tank cap D65
913.300-39
Pump body
with delivery piston
101.851-64
23
Lip ring I 16
915.402-01
24
Pressure spring
1,6x10x59 Niro
911.200-96
25
Bolt
101.909-45
27
Casing
151.005-35
Sealing set
101.862-64
Cheese head M4x20
Parallel straight pin

6x24
800.007-21
Cranked grip M8x27
922.200-01
Hand lever
151.011-45
Set screw M4x12
800.417-04
Washer 34x2
101.908-45
Return valve
952.800-62
Reservoir
101.853-25
Pipe
101.927-45
15
Opening plug PG9
972.205-02
16
Straight panel screwing

for PFH-L/8 Niro
101.871-65
101.871-66
for PFH-L/6 Niro
17
915.100-87
18
915.100-84
EUGEN WOERNER GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1661
DE-97866 Wertheim
Hafenstrasse 2
DE-97877 Wertheim
Leaflet-No.
Page 2 of 3
0369 EN
Purch.-no.
Important information on this publication

Reproduction, also in extracts, only permitted with the approval of the firm of EUGEN
WOERNER GmbH & Co. KG.
All the information in this publication has been examined for correctness with great care.
Nevertheless, WOERNER cannot assume any liability for losses or damage resulting
directly or indirectly from the application of the information contained in this publication.
All products from WOERNER may only be used as intended and corresponding to the
information in this publication.
For products supplied with operating instructions, the additional directives and information
contained in them are to be complied with.
Materials deviating from those mentioned in this publication and the technical documents
which further apply may only be poured into and processed in the appliances and systems
manufactured and supplied by WOERNER by following agreement with and written
approval by WOERNER.
The safety and danger information stated in the safety data sheets of the substances used
must be taken into account at all costs.
Transportation of gases, liquefied gases, gases under pressure, vapours and liquids, the
vapour pressure of which is more than 0,5 bar above normal atmospheric pressure
(1013 mbar) at the maximum admissible temperature, of easy inflammable or explosive
media as well as transportation of foodstuffs is forbidden.
Information on EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)

With Directive 2002/95/EC of January 27, 2003, for the limitation of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices (RoHS) material bans come into
effect from July 2006 for electrical and electronic devices newly placed on the market for
lead, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, mercury and brominated flame retardants.
In its controls and switching devices, WOERNER only uses materials which fulfil the criteria
of EU Directive 2002/95/EC.
To the extent that hexavalent chromium has been used as corrosion protection in the parts
which we produce ourselves, it has already been replaced by other environmentally
tolerable protective measures.
The mechanical devices supplied by WOERNER are not affected by EU Directive
2002/95/EC as they are appliances added or installed on "large-scale stationary industrial
tools" (cf. EU Directive 2002/96/EC, Annex IA).
But as WOERNER is conscious of its responsibility towards the environment, we shall also
use materials fulfilling the requirements of the Directive for devices not covered by EU
Directive 2002/95/EC as soon as they are generally available and their use is technically
possible.
EUGEN WOERNER
GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1661
DE-97866 Wertheim
Hafenstrasse 2
DE-97877 Wertheim
Leaflet-No.
Page 3 of 3
0369 EN
FLENDER ARPEX
all-steel couplings
ARS-6, ARP-6, ARH-8,
ARC-6/8/10, ARW-4/6, ARF-6 series
BA 8704 en 04/2012
FLENDER couplings
FLENDER ARPEX
all-steel couplings
Technical data
General notes
Safety instructions
Transport and
storage
Technical
description
Fitting
Startup
Operation
Faults, causes
and remedy
Maintenance
and repair
10
Spare parts,
customer service
11
Declarations
12
Translation of the original operating instructions
BA 8704 en 04/2012
2 / 37
Notes and symbols in these operating instructions

Note: The term "operating instructions" will in the following also be shortened to "instructions" or "manual".
Legal notes
Warning-note concept
This manual comprises notes which must be observed for your personal safety and for preventing material damage.
Notes for your personal safety are marked with a warning triangle or an "Ex" symbol (when applying
Directive 94/9/EC), those only for preventing material damage with a "STOP" sign.
WARNING! Imminent explosion!
The notes indicated by this symbol are given to prevent explosion damage.
Disregarding these notes may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING! Imminent personal injury!
The notes indicated by this symbol are given to prevent personal injury.
Disregarding these notes may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING! Imminent damage to the product!
The notes indicated by this symbol are given to prevent damage to the product.
Disregarding these notes may result in material damage.
NOTE!
The notes indicated by this symbol must be treated as general operating information.
Disregarding these notes may result in undesirable results or conditions.
WARNING! Hot surfaces!
The notes indicated by this symbol are made to prevent risk of burns due to hot surfaces
and must always be observed.
Disregarding these notes may result in light or serious injury.
Where there is more than one hazard, the warning note for whichever hazard is the most serious is always used.
If in a warning note a warning triangle is used to warn of possible personal injury, a warning of material damage may
be added to the same warning note.
Qualified personnel
The product or system to which these instructions relate may be handled only by persons qualified for the work
concerned and in accordance with the instructions relating to the work concerned, particularly the safety and
warning notes contained in those instructions. Qualified personnel must be specially trained and have the
experience necessary to recognise risks associated with these products or systems and to avoid possible hazards.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
3 / 37
Intended use of Siemens products

Observe also the following:
Siemens products must be used only for the applications provided for in the catalogue and the relevant
technical documentation. If products and components of other makes are used, they must be
recommended or approved by Siemens. The faultfree, safe operation of the products calls for proper
transport, proper storage, erection, assembly, installation, startup, operation and maintenance. The
permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to. Notes in the relevant documentations must be
observed.
Trademarks
All designations indicated with the registered industrial property mark are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
Other designations used in these instructions may be trademarks the use of which by third parties for their own
purposes may infringe holders rights.
Exclusion of liability
We have checked the content of the instructions for compliance with the hard and software described.
Nevertheless, variances may occur, and so we can offer no warranty for complete agreement. The information
given in these instructions is regularly checked, and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Note on the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

Siemens couplings in the "FLENDER couplings" product range must be treated as "components" in the sense
of the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Therefore, Siemens needs not issue a declaration of incorporation.
Information on safe fitting, safe startup and safe operation can be found in this instructions manual; in addition
the "warningnote concept" therein must be observed.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
4 / 37
Contents
1.
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
View of the various types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
8
3.
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
Obligations of the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.
Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
4.1
4.2
4.3
Scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage of the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
10
10
5.
Technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
5.1
5.2
5.3
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marking of the coupling parts for use in potentially explosive zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating conditions in potentially explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
13
6.
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.1.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.9
6.9.1
6.10
6.11
6.11.1
6.12
General information on fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructions for machining the finished bore, axial fastening, set screws and balancing . . . . . . . .
Finished bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel keyway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axial fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting the coupling parts in case of shafthub connection with parallel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demounting the shafthub connection with parallel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shrink connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamping and slip hub connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split clamping hubs with halfshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting split spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting split spacers with creepcurrent insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"C", "D" and "F" flange screw connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting of assemblybalanced couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushing the units together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting spacer or intermediate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting the plate packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
19
19
20
20
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
26
27
27
28
29
29
30
BA 8704 en 04/2012
5 / 37
7.
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
7.1
Procedure before startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
8.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
8.1
General operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
9.
Faults, causes and remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible faults when selecting the coupling and/or coupling size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible faults when installing the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible faults in maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
33
33
33
34
10.
Maintenance and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
10.1
10.2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing plate packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
11.
Spare parts, customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
11.1
11.2
Spareparts stockage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addresses for ordering spare parts and customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
12.
Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
12.1
EC declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
BA 8704 en 04/2012
6 / 37
1.
Technical data
Technical data, such as dimensions, weights, performance data, peak torques, operating life and
operating temperature ranges, etc., relating to the ARPEX couplings listed in these operating instructions
are documented in the product catalogues set out in table 1 and can be made available on request or
accessed on the Internet at any time (see back cover).
Where the coupling design deviates from that shown in the respective catalogue, an orderspecific
dimensioned drawing containing all the required technical data is enclosed with the delivery.
Table 1:
Assignment product catalogues
Series
Catalogue-No.
ARS6
ARP6
ARH8
ARC8/10
ARW4/6
ARF6
MD 10.1
MD 10.1
K430
MD 10.1
MD 10.1
MD 10.1
These data together with the contractual agreements on the coupling determine the limits of its proper use.
Limited temperature ranges apply to use in potentially explosive environments in
accordance with Directive 94/9/EC. The classification in temperature classes is shown
in item 5.3, "Conditions of use".
For sustained faultfree operation the coupling must be designed with an application
factor appropriate to the application. In the event of a change in operating conditions
(output, speed, changes to the prime mover and driven machine) the design must
always be checked.
1.1
View of the various types
ARP6
ARS6
ARC6/8/10
ARH8
ARW4/6
ARF6
Fig. 1:
View of the various types
BA 8704 en 04/2012
7 / 37
2.
General notes
2.1
Introduction
These instructions are an integral part of the delivery of the coupling and must be kept in its vicinity for
reference at all times.
All persons carrying out work on the coupling must have read and understood these
instructions and must adhere to them. Siemens accepts no responsibility for damage
or disruption caused by disregard of these instructions.
The "FLENDER coupling" described in these instructions has been developed for stationary use in
general engineering applications. The coupling serves to transmit power (torque and speed) between two
shafts or flanges connected by this coupling.
The coupling has been manufactured in accordance with the state of the art and is delivered in a condition
for safe and reliable use. Any changes on the part of the user which may affect safety and reliability are
prohibited. This applies equally to safety features designed to prevent accidental contact.
The coupling complies with the requirements in Directive 94/9/EC.
The coupling must be used and operated strictly in accordance with the conditions laid down in the contract
governing performance and supply.
The coupling is designed only for the application described on the orderspecific drawing of the coupling.
Other operating conditions are regarded as incorrect and must be contractually agreed.
For any damage resulting therefrom only the user or operator of the machine or plant is responsible.
The coupling described in these instructions reflects the state of technical development at the time these
instructions went to print.
In the interest of technical progress we reserve the right to make changes to the individual assemblies and
accessories which we regard as necessary to preserve their essential characteristics and improve their
efficiency and safety.
2.2
Copyright
The copyright to these instructions is held by Siemens AG.
These instructions must not be wholly or partly reproduced for competitive purposes, used in any
unauthorised way or made available to third parties without our agreement.
Technical enquiries should be addressed to the following factory or to one of our customer services:
Siemens AG
Schlavenhorst 100
46395 Bocholt
Tel.:
Fax:
+49 (0)2871 / 92-0

+49 (0)2871 / 92-2596
BA 8704 en 04/2012
8 / 37
3.
Safety instructions
Any changes on the part of the user are not permitted. This applies equally to safety
features designed to prevent accidental contact.
3.1
Obligations of the user
The operator must ensure that all persons involved in installation, operation, maintenance and repair
have read and understood these operating instructions and comply with them at all times in order to:
avoid injury or damage,
ensure the safety and reliability of the coupling,
avoid disruptions and environmental damage through incorrect use.
During transport, assembly, installation, demounting, operation and maintenance of the unit, the
relevant safety and environmental regulations must be complied with at all times.
The coupling may only be operated, maintained and/or repaired by persons qualified for the work
concerned (see "Qualified personnel" on page 3 of this manual).
All work must be carried out with great care and with due regard to safety.
All work on the coupling must be carried out only when it is at a standstill. The drive unit must be secured
against being switched on accidentally (e.g. by locking the key switch or removing the fuses from the
power supply). A notice should be attached to the ON switch stating clearly that work is in progress.
The coupling must be fitted with suitable safeguards to prevent accidental contact. The operation of the
coupling must not be impaired by the safeguard.
For the use in potentially explosive environments the protective equipment must
comply at least with type of protection IP2X.
The drive unit must be shut down as soon as changes to the coupling are detected during operation.
If the coupling is intended for installation in plant or equipment, the manufacturer of such plant or
equipment must ensure that the contents of the present operating instructions are incorporated in his
own instructions.
Spare parts must be obtained from Siemens (see section 11, "Spare parts, customer service").
BA 8704 en 04/2012
9 / 37
4.
Transport and storage

Observe the instructions in section 3, "Safety instructions".
4.1
Scope of supply
The products supplied are listed in the dispatch papers. Check on receipt to ensure that all the products
listed have actually been delivered. Parts damaged during transport or missing parts must be reported in
writing immediately. After consulting Siemens an expert is to be called in.
A damaged coupling becomes an explosion hazard. Operating the coupling with
damaged coupling parts is not permitted in potentially explosive environments in
accordance with Directive 94/9/EC.
4.2
Transport
When transporting the unit, use only lifting and handling equipment of sufficient
loadbearing capacity.
The coupling must be transported using suitable transport equipment only.
Different forms of packaging may be used depending on the size of the coupling and method of transport.
Unless otherwise agreed, the packaging complies with the HPE Packaging Guidelines.
The symbols marked on the packing must be observed at all times. These have the following meanings:
Top
Fig. 2:
4.3
Fragile
Keep dry
Keep cool
Centre of
gravity
Use no hand
hook
Attach
here
Transport symbols
Storage of the coupling

The coupling is delivered in a preserved condition and can be stored in a covered, dry place for up to
6 months. If the unit is to be stored for a longer period, it should be treated with a longterm preservative
agent (Siemens must be consulted).
Correctly stored couplings retain their properties unchanged. Unfavourable storage conditions and
improper treatment will negatively affect the physical properties of the coupling. Such negative effects may
be caused by e.g. the action of extreme temperatures or humidity.
The storage area must be dry and free from dust. The couplings must not be stored with aggressive
chemicals, acids, alkalis, etc.
Damp storage rooms (air humidity higher than 65 %) are not suitable. Ensure that no
condensation occurs.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
10 / 37
5.
Technical description
5.1
General description
Fig. 3:
1
2
3
4
Hexagonal plate pack and octagonal plate pack

Hub
Plate pack
Spacer
Plate pack
5
6
7
8
Hub
Hexagonal ring plate pack
Hexagonal tie plate pack
Octagonal tie plate pack
ARPEX couplings are allsteel couplings. The plate packs are arranged between the flanges of the
coupling parts and bolted to them alternately.
The individual plates are threaded onto bushes and clamped together with a clipped on, internally bevelled
retaining rings. The retaining rings are held on by the expanded bush ends, which lie against the angled
face.
So constructed, the plate pack in ring plate pack designs forms a complete unit. In tie plate packs the
individual tie plates are crimped together to form plate strands and then pushed together in the shape of
a ring to form the plate pack.
Through this arrangement of the plate packs the ARPEX coupling is torsionresistant and transmits the
torque without circumferential backlash. In axial and radial direction the coupling is however still flexible
and can absorb axial, radial and angular misalignment of the coupled units.
Depending on the series, collar bolts and nuts or conical screw connections join the plate packs to sleeve
and coupling part flanges.
The size designation of the coupling indicates the outside flange diameter (da) of the coupling in mm and
the configuration of the plate pack ("6" = hexagonal) This information is prefixed by a letter combination
specifying the component parts of the coupling.
Example:
ARS6 NHN 2556

Coupling with 2 hubs (N) and 1 "H" spacer (H) size 2556 with hexagonal plate pack in
the ARS6 series
BA 8704 en 04/2012
11 / 37
5.2
Marking of the coupling parts for use in potentially explosive zones

Couplings which are ordered in ATEX configuration, have the following marks on the outer circumference
of one of the coupling part (e.g. on the hub):
Complete mark:
Siemens AG
II 2G T2/T3/T4/T5/T6 -40CvTav230/150/85/50/35C
46395 Bocholt Germany

FLENDER couplings ARPEX <year built>
II 2D T 120 C -40CvTav70C
I M2
Abbreviated mark:
Siemens AG
II 2G TX
46395 Bocholt Germany

FLENDER couplings ARPEX <year built>
II 2D T 120 C -40CvTav70C
I M2
All component parts must also be marked

packaging only need be marked).
(in the case of small components, if necessary, the
If, in addition to the CE mark, the letter "U" together with the Siemens order number has been stamped
on, the coupling part has been delivered by Siemens un or prebored.
Siemens supplies unbored and prebored couplings with CE marking only under the
condition that the customer assumes the responsibility and liability for correct
refinishing in a declaration of exemption.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
12 / 37
5.3
Operating conditions in potentially explosive areas

The machines connected by the coupling must be earthed by an earth leakage
resistance < 106 .
If coated couplings are used in potentially explosive areas, the requirements made of
the conductivity of the coating and the limitation on the thickness of the coat applied
must be observed in accordance with standard "DIN EN 134631". Where coatings
have a thickness less than 200 m, no electrostatic charge is to be expected.
If they are to be used below ground in potentially explosive areas the couplings must
only be used with drive motors, which can be switched off on occurring of an
explosible atmosphere.
Equipment group I (underground applications, mining)

Category M2 (coupling is not approved for equipment category M1).
Equipment category II (use above ground, industry)

Categories 2 and 3 (coupling is not approved for equipment category 1).
Material group G (areas, in which there are explosible gas, vapour, mist, air mixtures),
zones 1 and 2 (coupling is not approved for use in zone 0).
Material group D (areas where dust can form explosible atmospheres),
Zones 21 and 22 (coupling is not approved for equipment category 20).
Explosion group IIC (Explosion groups IIA and IIB are included in IIC).
The permissible temperature classes and/or maximum surface temperatures are assigned as
a function of the maximum ambient temperature occurring in the immediate vicinity of the coupling
(see table 2).
Table 2:
Temperature classes
Ambient temperature
Temperature class
- 40 C up to max. + 230 C
T2
< 280 C
- 40 C up to max. + 150 C
T3
< 200 C
- 40 C up to max. + 85 C
T4
< 135 C
- 40 C up to max. + 50 C
T5
< 100 C
- 40 C up to max. + 35 C
T6
<
BA 8704 en 04/2012
13 / 37
Max. surface temperature
85 C
6.
Fitting
Observe the instructions in section 3, "Safety instructions"!
6.1
General information on fitting

Fitting work must be done with great care by qualified specialist personnel.
As early as during the planning phase it must be ensured that sufficient space is available for installation
and subsequent care and maintenance work.
Adequate lifting equipment must be available before beginning the fitting work.
The tightening torques specified in tabels 4, 5 and 6 must always be adhered to. Any
other tightening torques may result in accelerated wear and damage to the coupling.
Failure to observe the instructions in this section may result in breakage of the
coupling.
Danger to life from flying fragments.
Under no circumstances must welding work be done on the coupling or coupling
components, as this will negatively affect the physical property of the coupling.
If coated couplings are used in potentially explosive areas, the requirements made of
the conductivity of the coating and the limitation on the thickness of the coat applied
must be observed in accordance with standard "DIN EN 134631".
Where coatings have a thickness < 200 m, no electrostatic charge is to be expected.
Where coatings are thicker than 200 m, an electrostatic charge, e.g. by cleaning the
coupling, must be avoided.
At the customers express request Siemens also supplies unbored or prebored coupling parts for
couplings which will not be operated in potentially explosive environments as set out in Directive 94/9/EU.
The necessary refinishing must then be carried out in strict compliance with the following specifications
and with particular care!
Responsibility for carrying out the refinishing is borne by the customer. Siemens will
accept no guarantee claims arising from unsatisfactory refinishing.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
14 / 37
6.2
Instructions for machining the finished bore, axial fastening, set screws and balancing
6.2.1
Finished bore
Remove preservative agent from coupling parts.
Observe the manufacturers instructions for handling the solvent.
When machining the finished bore the parts must be carefully aligned. For the permissible radial and axial
runouts, refer to DIN ISO 286 Basic Degree of Tolerance IT 7.
The parts must be fitted on the marked faces (
) (see figure 4).
IT 7 B
IT 7 A
B
C
Fig. 4:
1
2
D1
D1
D1
IT 7
IT 7
Finished bore to ISO tolerances

"N"-hub / "B"-hub
"M"-hub
"M"-hub
The maximum permissible bore diameters (see section 1, "Technical Data") are
designed for drivetype fastenings without taper action to DIN 6885/1 and must not
under any circumstances be exceeded. The finishmachined bores must be 100 %
checked with suitable measuring equipment.
If other shafthub connections (such as splined hub profiles, taper or stepped bores and drivetype
fastenings with taper action or other connections) are to be used instead of the drivetype fastenings
provided for, Siemens must be consulted.
For drive by means of parallel keys the following fit pairs are prescribed for the bores (see table 3):
Table 3:
Fit pairs
Type of fit
Shaft tolerance
Interference fit with parallel-key

connection
Shrink fit without parallel-key connection
Bore tolerances
Reversing operation
Setting-up operation
h6
P7
N7
k6
M7
H7
m6
K7
H7
n6
J7
H7
p6
H7
F7
to customer
specification
on request
on request
The assigned fits must be adhered to in order, on the one hand, to keep the play in the
shafthub connection as low as possible, depending on utilisation of the tolerance
zones, and, on the other, to keep the hub tension arising from the oversize within the
permissible load limit. Failure to adhere to the assigned fits may impair the shafthub
connection.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
15 / 37
6.2.1.1 Parallel keyway

The parallel keyways must be designed to suit the available parallel keys. For parallel keyways the
tolerance zone of the hub keyway width ISO P9 must be adhered to.
6.2.2
Axial fastening
A set screw or end plate must be provided to secure the coupling parts axially. If end plates are used,
Siemens must be consulted with regard to machining the recesses in the coupling parts.
6.2.3
Set screws
To prevent damage to the shafts, the setscrew hole should be arranged on the parallel
keyway.
In exceptional cases the set screw must be offset 180 to the parallel keyway, if
because of the diameter of the drilled hole and hub core too little material is left
between the parallel keyway and the hub core (e.g. series ARS6, size 786).
e
Fig. 5:
Setscrew bore
The following guidelines must be observed:

The set screw should be inserted in the centre of the hub core (see figure 5). If this option is not possible,
care must be taken that the distance (e) is at least M x 1.5.
Use a threaded stud with cup point to DIN 916 for set screws.
The length of the set screw must be selected so that it fills the threaded hole, but does
not project from the hub (Lmin. = M x 1.2).
BA 8704 en 04/2012
16 / 37
6.2.4
Balancing
Prebored couplings and/or prebored coupling parts are delivered unbalanced. It is recommended that
these parts are balanced to suit the application after finishboring (see DIN 740, DIN ISO 1940 part 1).
Balancing is normally done by drilling material away. To keep the amount of material to be removed to
a minimum, a largest possible balance radius must be selected (see figure 6).
Finishbored couplings and/or coupling parts are balanced according to the customers specifications.
Fig. 6:
6.3
Arrangement of the balancing bore with onelevel balancing (balanced after machining the
keyway)
Fitting the coupling parts in case of shafthub connection with parallel key
Before beginning assembly the fitting bores and contact surfaces for rings, bushes, nuts and closefitting
bolts or taper pins and bushes (see item 6.12, "Fitting the plate packs" and/or separate assembly
instructions) must be cleaned of any rustpreventer. Likewise, the shaft ends must be carefully cleaned.
The coupling parts must be fitted with the aid of suitable equipment to avoid damaging
the shaft bearings through axial joining forces. Always use suitable lifting equipment.
The shaft ends should not project from the inner sides of the hub. If necessary, the hubs can be adjusted
to the length of the shaft by fitting spacers or spacer rings (see figure 7). Axial fastening can be effected
by means of a set screw or end plate.
L1
Fig. 7:
1
Spacer ring
Spacer ring
The set screws should be tightened only with a hexagon socket spanner to
DIN ISO 2936, without extension tube.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
17 / 37
In case of hubs with a parallelkey connection fitting may be aided by slightly heating the coupling hubs
(maximum 150 C).
Take precautions to avoid burns from hot parts.
Wear suitable protective gloves.
Hubs with transition fits and heated hubs can be pulled onto the slightly oiled shaft end with the aid of
a fitting device.
Screw threaded rod (the size of the thread depends on the shaft diameter) into the shaft end. Fit an
appropriately sized washer over the threaded rod. By screwing on and tightening a nut the hub is pushed
onto the shaft (see figure 8).
Fig. 8:
1
2
6.4
Fitting the hub with threaded rod

Threaded rod
Washer
Nut
Demounting the shafthub connection with parallel key

If a coupling hub with parallelkey connection is to be pulled off the shaft, the plate packs must first be
demounted. Then, if necessary, the end plate can be demounted or the set screw loosened. With the aid
of a detaching device (threearmed pullingoff device) or by inserting a pullingoff device into the pullingoff
holes provided if these are required in the order pull the hub off the shaft end (see fig. 9 and 10).
In case of an interference fit the hub must, if necessary, be evenly slightly heated with a burner and carefully
pulled off the shaft, using a detaching device.
Check the demounted parts to see if they can be reused and, if necessary, return them to Siemens for
repair.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
18 / 37
Fig. 9:
1
Hub with tapped pullingoff holes

Pulling-off holes
Fig. 10: Threearmed pullingoff device (cannot be used for all hubs)
6.5
Shrink connections
6.5.1
Fitting
Cylindrical shrink fits are joined by heating the outer part. The correct joining temperature is calculated by
the manufacturer specifically for the order and is shown on the coupling drawing delivered with the unit.
To avoid premature locking the joining operation must be carried out quickly in a draughtfree area.
Care must be taken to keep transport distances short.
In the case of stepped shaft ends, when the hubs are pulled on, the locking bolts must
be removed from the threaded connections. When the hubs have been pulled on, the
locking screws must be screwed back in.
The surfaces to be joined must be absolutely clean and greasefree.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
19 / 37
6.5.2
Demounting
The coupling hubs must be provided with one or more oil channels, depending on length and design. The
oil must be injected into the join by way of the oil connections the number of which corresponds to the
number of oil pumps. Axial misalignment is achieved by means of a separate hydraulic press or
mechanical pullingoff device.
Secure hub axially. Risk of injury from falling coupling parts.
6.6
Clamping and slip hub connection

Forces are transmitted frictionally by the ARPEX clamping and slip hubs. The clamping or slip hubs are
delivered in an assembled condition (ready to fit) (see figs. 11 and 12).
Fig. 11: Clamping hub, type 124 (example: ARS6)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Tensioning bolt
Bevel surface "lubricated"
free of grease
Clamping hub
Clamping ring
Forcing-off bolt
Shaft
1
3
2
5
4
Fig. 12: Slip hub, type 125 (example: ARS6)

1
2
3
4
Forcing-off thread
Bronze bush
Bevel surface "lubricated"
free of grease
5
6
7
8
BA 8704 en 04/2012
20 / 37
Tensioning bolt
Clamping hub
Clamping ring
Shaft
6.6.1
Fitting
During fitting the following procedure must be observed:
Degrease the hub bore and shaft.

Hub bore and shaft must be absolutely clean and free of grease.
Slightly loosen the tensioning bolts and pull the clamping ring off the hub slightly so that the clamping
ring sits loosely on it.
Push the hub onto the shaft.
Tighten the tensioning bolts evenly one after the other, going round several times until the clamping ring
lies evenly against the flange of the clamping or slip hub. The clamp connection is able to function when
the torque for tensioning bolts (quality 10.9) specified in table 5, "Tightening torques for connecting and
tensioning bolts" in item 6.8.1 has been reached and the clamping ring thus lies up against the hub
flange.
Failure to observe these instructions may impair the function of the clamping and/or
slip hub.
3
1
Fig. 13: Demounting with highpressure pump

1
2
Forcing-off bolt ISO 4017

G1/4"
BA 8704 en 04/2012
21 / 37
High-pressure pump
6.6.2
Demounting
Undo the tensioning bolts evenly one after the other. Each bolt must be loosened only half a turn per pass.
Unscrew all tensioning bolts 3 to 4 thread turns.
If the clamping ring does not come free off the clamping or slip hub by itself, forcingoff bolts to match the
number of available threads must be inserted in the ARPEX flange and evenly tightened until the clamping
ring comes free. Before once more pulling on the clamping ring, remove the bolts once more!
Clamping and slip hubs of type 124 (see Fig. 11) have, dependent on the size, already been equipped with
forcingoff bolts in the clamping ring. Before once more pulling on the clamping ring screw them back to
their original position!
If these actions do not work in case of larger clamping hubs, oil must be pumped by a highpressure pump
into the join between the clamping ring and the clamping hub to release the clamping ring. For this the
highpressure hose of the pump must be connected to the clamping ring via the G1/4" connecting thread
on the outer circumference (see Fig. 13).
Before reclamping remove the forcingoff bolts and reseal the G1/4" connecting thread, using the plug
supplied with the unit.
If the clamping ring is pulled off the clamping hub hydraulically, the bevel faces must be cleaned of
hydraulic oil and regreased with "Altemp Q NB 50" (Co. Klber).
Released clampinghub connections do not have to be demounted and regreased before being
retensioned. If however the bevel faces still have to be regreased, the abovementioned lubricant must
be used.
6.7
Split clamping hubs with halfshell

The halfshells are loosely bolted to the hubs (see figure 14).
3
Fig. 14: Split clamping hub with halfshell
1
2
Marking by numbers
Gap dimension
BA 8704 en 04/2012
22 / 37
Marking by numbers
6.7.1
Fitting
Before fitting, the halfshells must be removed from the hubs and the holes carefully cleaned and
degreased using a suitable degreasing agent.
Do not interchange halfshells.
Check that the number markings (markingpunch number) at the side of the hub core
are identical (see Fig. 14).
Place the clamping hubs on the shaft ends. The tension screws in the halfshell must first be evenly
screwed up only handtight.
Ensure the halfshells are evenly seated. Check the gap size is even and, if necessary,
adjust.
Then, using a torque wrench, tighten the tension screws alternately in at least 3 passes (see table 4).
First pass:
Tighten the clamping bolts to 30 % of the tightening torque (see table 4).
Second pass: Tighten the clamping bolts to 60 % of the tightening torque (see table 4).
Third pass:
Table 4:
Tighten the clamping bolts to 100 % of the tightening torque (see table 4).
Tightening torques for split clamping hubs with halfshell
Bolt
ISO 4762 (DIN 912)
Thread
Tightening torque
30%
60%
100%
[Nm]
[Nm]
[Nm]
M6
12
M8
18
30
18
36
60
30
60
100
M14
48
96
160
M16
75
150
250
M10
M12
6.7.2
Quality
10.9
Demounting
Demounting is done in reverse order of fitting. Here the tension screws must be undone alternately in at
least 2 to 3 passes.
Risk of injury from falling coupling parts.
Secure all coupling parts before undoing the clamping bolts.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
23 / 37
6.8
Split spacers
Split spacers are fitted together according to length and tightened handtight or delivered as single parts.
6.8.1
Fitting split spacers
Before assembly the fitting holes and the contact surfaces of the coupling parts must be degreased.
Fitting holes and contact surfaces of the coupling parts must be absolutely clean and
greasefree.
The inner and outer "recess" (centering pin, figure 15) and the fitting bores as well as the contact faces
of the individual parts of the split spacer must be inspected for any damage and, if necessary, reworked.
Before fitting the connecting bolts note any balancing marks (see fig. 15 and fig. 16). If the spacers are
unmarked, the halves must be fitted so that the fitting holes of the outer flanges are correctly aligned
(see fig. 15 and fig. 16).
The connection of the "recess" or closefitting bolt must be joined accurately and carefully.
The connecting bolts must be tightened crosswise and evenly with the specified tightening torque
(see table 5, "Tightening torques for connecting and tensioning bolts").
Care must be taken that the "recess" connection is straight.

Failure to observe these instructions may result in impairing the proper function of the
coupling.
3
4
Fig. 15: Uspacer with "recess" (centering pin) (ARS6)
1
2
Marking on balanced spacer,

during fitting, the balance marks must be
one above the other
Fitting bore
3
4
BA 8704 en 04/2012
24 / 37
All-steel locking nut to DIN 980 Form "V"

Hexagon bolt to ISO 4017 - 8.8
3
4
Fig. 16: Uspacer with closefitting bolts (ARC8)
1
Marking on balanced spacer Spacer,

during fitting, the balance marks must be
one above the other
Table 5:
Thread
2
3
4
Fitting bore
Flanged nut
Close-fitting bolt - 10.9
Tightening torques for connecting and clamping bolts

Tightening torque TA
Standard screw
+ standard nut to DIN
and ISO
Standard screw
+ locking nut to DIN 980
See figure 15
Close-fitting bolt
+ collar nut
Tensioning bolt
Strength class 8.8
Strength class 8.8
Strength class 10.9
M5
5 Nm
6 Nm
7 Nm
M6
9 Nm
11 Nm
12 Nm
M8
20 Nm
25 Nm
30 Nm
M 10
41 Nm
50 Nm
60 Nm
M 12
70 Nm
80 Nm
100 Nm
M 14
110 Nm
125 Nm
160 Nm
M 16
170 Nm
195 Nm
250 Nm
M 18
235 Nm
260 Nm
350 Nm
M 20
330 Nm
370 Nm
480 Nm
M 22
450 Nm
500 Nm
660 Nm
M 24
570 Nm
640 Nm
850 Nm
M 27
840 Nm
920 Nm
1200 Nm
M 30
1140 Nm
1200 Nm
1700 Nm
M 36
2000 Nm
2100 Nm
3100 Nm
BA 8704 en 04/2012
25 / 37
6.8.2
Fitting split spacers with creepcurrent insulation

Here the apply the same assembly instructions as those in item 6.8.1, however in the case of "U"spacers
with integrated creepcurrent insulation (see Fig. 17) the tightening torques in table 6, "Tightening torques
for connecting bolts with creepcurrent insulation" must always be adhered to.
Fig. 17: Split spacer with creepcurrent insulation

1
Creep-current insulation
Table 6:
Fitting bore
Tightening torques for connecting bolts with creepcurrent insulation

Thread
M6
10 Nm
M8
20 Nm
M 10
38 Nm
M 12
75 Nm
M 16
155 Nm
M 20
280 Nm
M 24
470 Nm
M 30
1000 Nm
M 36
1550 Nm
The tightening torques indicated in tables 5 and 6 apply only to untreated bolts which
are inserted (only lightly oiled) in the condition as delivered.
Other tightening values, which are additionally documented or must be enquired
about from the manufacturer, apply to coated or separately treated bolts.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
26 / 37
6.9
"C", "D" and "F" flange screw connection

"C", "D" and "F" flanges are delivered readyassembled as an individual part or with a spacer, as agreed.
6.9.1
Fitting
Before fitting the coupling parts must be carefully cleaned with a suitable cleaning agent.
The "recess" (centering pin, Fig. 18) or fitting bores (Fig. 19) and the contact face of the "C", "D" and
"F" flange must be inspected for any damage and, if necessary, reworked.
The connection of the "recess" or closefitting bolt must be joined accurately and carefully.
The connecting bolts must be tightened crosswise and evenly with the specified tightening torque
(see table 5).
Care must be taken that the "recess" connection is straight.

Failure to observe these instructions may result in impairing the proper function of the
coupling.
6
3
4
Fig. 18: "C" and "F" flange screw connection (example ARS)
1
2
3
4
"C" flange
"F" flange
Connection provided by the customer
"Recess" connection
5
6
7
BA 8704 en 04/2012
27 / 37

1)
1)
Fig. 19: Fflange connection (example ARC)

1)
Detail "X"
1
2
3
4
Transport lock / mounting aid

Tensioning bolt
Fitting spacer
Fitting of assemblybalanced couplings
AAAA
AAAA
AAAA
On couplings which have been assemblybalanced each individual coupling component must be marked
on the outside diameter of the flange with a fourdigit number (Figure 20, "AAAA"). When assembling, care
must be taken that only coupling parts having the same numbers on the outside circumference of the flange
are bolted together. The coupling parts must be arranged so that the numbers are in line and can be read
from one direction (see figure 20). Only in this way will the balancing condition meet the requirements!
AAAA
6.10
5
6
7
"F" flange
Close-fitting bolt with collar nut
Fig. 20: Marking in case of assembly balancing

1
2
readable from here

Hub 1
3
4
BA 8704 en 04/2012
28 / 37
Spacer
Hub 2
6.11
Pushing the units together

Set the shafts of the machines to be connected exactly the required shaft distance apart and align the
machines precisely (see figure 21).
Fig. 21: Aligning the units

1
Distance "SX" between shafts
6.11.1 Inserting spacer or intermediate unit

If necessary, using suitable lifting gear, insert spacer or intermediate unit between the flanges.
Notice, Danger of squeezing. Wear safety gloves.
If intermediate units with prefitted plate packs are used, they should not be demounted. The plate packs
are secured with transport locks (they are also used to facilitate assembly; see Detail "X" figure 19).
After inserting the intermediate unit the transport locks must be removed, before the screw connections
of the flanges are tightened to the specified tightening torque.
Operation with the transport locks fitted is not permissible. Remove all transport
locks.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
29 / 37
6.12
Fitting the plate packs

ARPEX plate packs are packed individually, when delivered. The delivery includes instructions for fitting
ARPEX plate packs in German. Instructions in other languages must be ordered separately.
ARPEX fitting instructions include all the necessary data and instructions for correctly fitting the plate
packs.
The tightening torques for the plate pack bolting should exclusively be taken from the related
actual assembly instructions!
Furthermore all necessary details for alignment of the units to be connected are documented.
Matching of all existing sets of fitting instructions with their series is shown in table 7.
The sets of fitting instructions set out below can be ordered from Siemens or on the Internet (see back
cover).
Table 7:
Matching of the individual series with their fitting instructions
Series
ARS6
ARP6
ARP6
ARC6/8/10
ARF6
ARW4/6
ARH8
Type
Assembly instructions
with close-fitting screw connection
AN 4200
with conical bolting
AN 4243
3-part (e.g. "NAN") with close-fitting screw connection
AN 4224
3-part (e.g. "NAN") with conical bolting
AN 4256
5-part (e.g. "MCECM") with close-fitting screw

connection
AN 4228
5-part (e.g. "MCECM") with conical bolting
AN 4253
Standard version
AN 4241
Version with special conical bolting
AN 4244
Standard version
AN 4233
AN 4239
AN 4254
AN 4213
AN 4246
BA 8704 en 04/2012
30 / 37
7.
Startup
7.1
Procedure before startup

Before startup the screw connections must be checked and, if necessary, retightened. The alignment
and the distance dimension "S1" (see tables in seriesspecific assembly instructions) must also be
checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
Coupling types with prefitted plate packs must be checked before startup to ensure that the transport
locks (see detail "X" Figure 19) have been completely removed.
Then finally fit the coupling guard to prevent unintentional contact.
For the use in potentially explosive environments the protective equipment must
comply at least with type of protection IP2X.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in breakage of the coupling.
8.
Operation
8.1
General operating data

During operation of the coupling watch for:
Changes in running noise
Sudden vibrations
If any malfunctions are noticed during operation, the drive assembly must be switched
off at once. The cause of the fault must be determined, using the fault table in section 9.
The troubleshooting table contains a list of possible faults, their causes and
suggested remedies.
If the cause cannot be identified or the unit repaired with the facilities available, you
are advised to contact one of the Siemens customerservice offices for specialist
assistance (see section 2).
BA 8704 en 04/2012
31 / 37
9.
Faults, causes and remedy

9.1
General
The following irregularities can serve as a guide for fault tracing.
Where the system is a complex one, all component units must be included when tracing faults.
The coupling must run with little noise and vibration in all operating phases. Irregular behaviour must be
treated as a fault requiring immediate remedy.
Siemens will not be bound by the terms of the guarantee or warranty or otherwise be
responsible in cases of improper use of the coupling, modifications on the coupling
carried out without the agreement of Siemens, or use of spare parts not supplied by
Siemens.
When remedying faults and malfunctions, the coupling must always be taken out of
service. Secure the drive unit to prevent it from being started up unintentionally.
A notice should be attached to the ON switch stating clearly that work is in progress.
We also refer to the relevant accident prevention regulations at the place of
installation.
9.2
Possible faults
Table 8:
Faults, causes and remedy
Faults
Sudden changes in the noise
level and/or sudden
vibrations.
Causes
Change in alignment.
Remedy
Stop the installation.
If necessary, rectify any cause of the
changes in alignment (e.g. by fastening loose
foundation bolts).
Plate breakage, torque

transmission via close-fitting
bolts / conical bolting
Check wear; procedure as described in

section 10.
Stop the installation.
Demount coupling and remove remains of
pack.
Check and replace damaged coupling parts.
Check and, if necessary, adjust alignment
(see section 6).
Operating the coupling with broken ARPEX plate packs is not permitted under
Directive 94/9/EC. A correct torque transmission is no longer guaranteed in such case.
Perform a visual check of the ARPEX coupling as described in section 10.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
32 / 37
9.3
Improper use
Experience has shown that the following faults can result in incorrect use of the ARPEX coupling. In
addition to observing the other instructions in this manual, care must therefore be taken to avoid these
faults.
Directive 94/9/EC requires the manufacturer and user to exercise especial care.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in breakage of the coupling.
Through incorrect use the coupling may become an explosion hazard.
Incorrect use of the ARPEX coupling can result in damage to the coupling.
Coupling damage may result in stoppage of the drive and the entire plant.
9.3.1
9.3.2
Possible faults when selecting the coupling and/or coupling size
Important information for describing the drive and the environment are not communicated.
System torque too high.
System speed too high.
Application factor not correctly selected.
Chemically aggressive environment is not taken into consideration.
The temperature in the direct vicinity of the coupling is beyond the permissible range.
Machining of a finished bore with incorrect diameter or incorrect fit assignment (see section 6).
The transmission capacity of the shafthub connection is not appropriate to the operating conditions.
Possible faults when installing the coupling
Components with transport or other damage are being fitted.
When fitting coupling parts in a heated condition, these components are being excessively heated.
The shaft diameter is beyond the specified tolerance range.
Coupling parts are interchanged during fitting work.
Specified tightening torques and/or angles are not being adhered to.
Alignment and/or shaftmisalignment values do not match the specifications in the assembly and/or
operating instructions.
The coupled machines are not correctly fastened to the foundation, and as a result shifting of the
machines e.g. through loosening of the foundationscrew connection is causing excessive
displacement of the coupling parts.
ARPEX plate packes are not fitted correctly (see seriesspecific assembly instructions).
The coupling protection used is not suitable for operation within the meaning of the
explosionprotection requirements and/or in accordance with Directive 94/9/EC.
Operating conditions are being changed without authorisation.
BA 8704 en 04/2012
33 / 37
9.3.3
10.
Possible faults in maintenance
Maintenance intervals are not being adhered to.
No genuine ARPEX plate packs are being used.
Damaged ARPEX plate packs are being used.
ARPEX plate packs are being used which do not meet the technical specification for the application.
Leakage in the vicinity of the coupling is not being identified and as a result chemically aggressive
media are damaging the coupling.
Maintenance and repair

All work on the coupling must be carried out only when it is at a standstill.
The drive unit must be secured against being switched on accidentally (e.g. by locking
the key switch or removing the fuses from the power supply). A notice should be
attached to the ON switch stating clearly that work is in progress.
We also refer to the relevant accident prevention regulations at the place of
installation.
10.1
General
ARPEX couplings do not require maintenance; however, they should be visually inspected during
regular system maintenance inspections at least once a year. Especial attention should be given to the
condition of the plate packs. If individual plates or several plates are broken, the plate pack affected must
be replaced (see item 10.2).
No further maintenance work is necessary.
If the above specified maintenance instructions are not adhered to, a correct operation
of the coupling within the meaning of Directive 94/9/EC can no longer be guaranteed.
10.2
Replacing plate packs

Only original ARPEX plate packs must be used for replacement in order to guarantee troublefree torque
transmission and faultfree operation.
Normally, the plate packs can be replaced without moving the coupled machines. Exceptions
are combinations with socalled "B" hubs (hubs which for reasons of space are fitted the other
way round and so project into the spacer) and special solutions.
For refitting, the instructions in section 6, "Assembly", and section 7, "Startup", must be carefully
observed!
BA 8704 en 04/2012
34 / 37
11.
Spare parts, customer service
11.1
Spareparts stockage
By stocking the most important spare parts on site you can ensure that the coupling is ready for use.
To order spare parts, refer to the spareparts list.
We guarantee only the original spare parts supplied by us. Nongenuine spare parts
have not been tested or approved by us. They may alter technical characteristics of
the coupling, thereby posing an active and/or passive risk to safety. Siemens will
assume no liability or guarantee for damage caused by nongenuine spare parts not
supplied by Siemens. The same applies to any accessories not supplied by Siemens.
Please note that certain components often have special production and supply specifications and that we
supply you with spare parts which comply fully with the current state of technical development as well as
current legislation.
When ordering spare parts, always state the following:
Quantity
Designation
Size
Number of the coupling drawing
Position of the spare part in the spareparts list
11.2
Addresses for ordering spare parts and customer service

When ordering spare parts or requesting a service specialist, please contact Siemens first (see section 2,
"General notes").
BA 8704 en 04/2012
35 / 37
12.
Declarations
12.1
EC declaration of conformity
EC declaration of conformity
within the meaning of EC Directive 94/9/EC of 23.03.1994 and the legal requirements laid down for its
implementation
The manufacturer, Siemens AG, 46395 Bocholt, Germany, declares that the equipment described in these
assembly and operating instructions:
FLENDER ARPEX
all-steel couplings
is in conformity with Article 1 and Article 8, Paragraph 1 b) ii) of Directive 94/9/EC and complies with the
requirements of Directive 94/9/EC and the following standards:
DIN EN 11271
DIN EN 134631
DIN EN 134635
DIN EN 1710
:
:
:
:
102011
072009
102011
082008
The technical documentation has been delivered to the body named below:
DEKRA EXAM GmbH, 44727 Bochum, Germany, code number: 0158.
Bocholt, 20120419
Andre Jansen
(Director Engineering KUE)
Bocholt, 20120419
Nicola Warning
(Director Business Subsegment KU)
BA 8704 en 04/2012
36 / 37
Further Information:
"FLENDER gear units" on the Internet
www.siemens.com/gearunits
"FLENDER couplings" on the Internet
www.siemens.com/couplings
Service & Support:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10803928/133300
Lubricants:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42961591/133000
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Mechanical Drives
Alfred-Flender-Strae 77
46395 Bocholt
GERMANY
Subject to modifications
Siemens AG 2012
www.siemens.com/drive-technologies
Datenblatt fr Drehstrom-Kurzschlulufer-Motor
Data sheet for threephase induction motor
Toleranz IEC 60034
tolerance IEC 60034
Typ
Type
IEC Baugre
IEC size
Bauform
Mounting design
Umgebungstemperatur
Ambient temperature
Schutzart
Type of enclosure
Ex-Schutzart
Ex-Protection
Wrmeklasse
Thermal classification
Bemessungsleistung
Rated output
Betriebsart
Duty type
Bemessungsspannung
Rated voltage
Frequenz
Frequency
Drehzahl
Speed
Bemessungsstrom
Rated current
Anlaufstrom
CD 100 L2 - 4
100
B3
-20 ... 40
IP 55
II 2G Ex de IIC T4 Gb
F
3,6
kW
S1
D 440
60
Hz
1700
7,2
IA/IN
min-1
rpm
A
5,5
Starting current
Leistungsfaktor
Power factor
Wirkungsgrad
Efficiency
Bemessungsmoment
Rated torque
Anlaufmoment
MA/MN
2,3
Starting torque
Kippmoment
MK/MN
2,7
Breakdown torque
Gewicht
Weight
Bemerkung
Remarks
0,82
80,5
20,2
Nm
46
mit Kaltleiter als alleiniger Schutz
geeignet fr FU-Betrieb
nur grundiert
Motornr. 546441 001
ATV 1 Sabrina Solte 02.07.2014
kg
Mabild
Dimension drawing
nderungen vorbehalten
Rights of modification reserved
CD 100L2-4
L
LD
b
a
SP
BA
HA
BC
DB
HD
AC
AA
BB
AB
O1
O2
GA
Motormae / Motor dimensions

AC
201
L
415
LD
149
SP
230
H
100-0,5
E
60
GA
31
F
8
DB
M10
AB
200
HA
15
B
140
K
12 H17
BA
45
AA
45
C
63
BB
175
Mae Anschlussraum / Dimensions terminal box

a
145
b
145
c
88
d
53
Kabeleinfhrung / Cable gland

Gewindegre
Thread
Kabeldurchmesser
Cable diameter
IM B3/IM 1001
Anschlussraum / Terminal Box:
EAR 80
Kundenkennung / ITEM No.:
Fumae / Feet dimensions

A
160
BC
17,5
Bauform / Mounting:
HD
305
Wellenmae / Shaft dimensions

D
28 j6
Prinzipskizze Anschlussraum
Schematic Diagram Terminal Box
O1
M32x1,5
O2
M25x1,5
12-21
8-17,5
Kundenmotor-Nr. / Cust. motor No.:
Ex.-Schutz / Ex. protection:
Ex de
Zertifikat / Certificate:
08 ATEX 1087 X
Spannung / Voltage:
Frequenz / Frequency:
Leistung / Output:
Polzahl / Number of poles:
Syn. Drehzahl / Syn. speed:
Lager DS / Bearing d.e.:
Lager NS / Bearing n.d.e.:
Gewicht ca. / Weight approx.:
Fettsorte / Grease type:
Nachschmierfrist / Interval:
Fettmenge / Grease quantity:
Raumtemp. / Ambient temp.:
Kaltleiter / PTC-thermistor:
D 440 V
60 Hz
3,6 kW
4
1800 min-1
6206 2Z C3
6206 2Z C3
46 kg
-20 bis / up to +40 C

O2
Alle Mae in mm / All dimen. in mm

Nicht mastblich / Not to scale
Bemerkung / Notes:
Abt. / Dep.:
ATV
Datum / Date: 02.07.2014
Angebots-Nr. / Offer No.:

Motor-Nr. / Motor No.:
Rev. / Rev.:
Name / Name:
Seite / Page:
CD100L2-4 de B3 13.1100.0.00.00.1.2.1.1.0.0
546.441.001
00
S.Solte
1
Dieses Mabild wurde mit dem Mabildgenerator Version 1.6 erstellt. Alle Angaben sind nur nach Besttigung durch den Hersteller verbindlich.
This dim. drawing is generated with the dimension drawing generator version 1.6 All entries are only binding after confirmation of the producer.
Operating Manual
Flame-Proof Motors
II 2G Ex d(e) IIC(B) T3-T6 Gb
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T200-85 C Db
!
#
$
"
%
!
"
#
!
#
$
$
!
$
&
' () *
-.
*
0
!
#
$
$
!
"&$# *
1
2
/0
4
0
4
(
0
3
6
6
0
0
8
$
9
3 3 1:
0
*
$
A* $B
0?
(
@6
0
A* $B
#$@
0
(
/
1
3
2
8
3
;3
0
<
0
A
0
8
=
8
>
>
6
0
3
3
3
;
;
A
9
>
0
>
#
#
A
=
/
? /
"
"
%
%
%
%
B
B
?
? /
? (
4
/
4
4
? 4
? 4
? (
? (
? 6
? 4
? 4
? 4
;
? 4
? 4
? 4
? ( 9
? 4
;
0
3
;
;
0
3
0
0
!
0
#
#
#
$
%
0
0
9
9
0
2
? 4
? 4
6
$
$
"
"
B
B
0
0
1
&
!"
!"
!B
!
/
?
? 4
? ,
? 4
/
3
4
? A
? /
;
? /
#
#
#
#
#
#
#!
##
##
#$
#"
0
0
=
;
#%
#B
C
"
A
A
? 6
? 8
8
3
C
$
#&
#&
#&
#&
3
6 A+= D )
3
6
D 6
)
0
;
3
E
1AA 2
0
AAA (
3
0
6
3
AA (
AA (
9
9
0
0
(
)
0
&
'#
(
0
(
0
)
0
>
(
>
*
0
>
(
>
>
0
D
>
0
A
"#
0
EFE
6
E/
C 9
9
0
1 /
+
,
'
'
G ;
#"2
.
0
8
.
.
9
I
3
<
1 ;
(
5
5
"
- &
- &
0
=
0
() *
+ ,
,
J
%$
3 "&$# *
( - K#& 1 2#%! !"$3
7 ;- K#& 1 2#%! !"$3 $&
34 L 3
A
-000
3
.
9
.
%
& '/ -
& '
6
A
0
C
(
/
!"
0
M (
1
N2
M (
M (
;
3
0 K$ @6
O% P
@6
K! @6 0
M A
:
M 7
0
"
(
A
C&
%
0
A* $B
@6
>
A* $B
(
#$@
=
1
(
9
B
& '/ -
/%
(
.
"
" "
"
"
"
&
%&
0
1
2
A
1
2 (
!B
(
/
9
(
0
(
3
@6
0
K# @6
;
1(
14/=2
0
! @6
(
(
0
7
(
(
0
" "
*
'( )
%
"
( ,""-
(
;
" "
"
>
5
0
;
9
9
M
M
M
M
M
; /
M 9
A
1(
(
0
!$$
5
(
0
0
4
2
0
0
3
!2
" "
"
/
+
" "
" "
" "
(
;
(
9
9
(
(
4
(
A/8
0
B "3! , 0
# (
0
3
!$
9
(
A* #
%2
9
3
1
!2
0 1
2
(
(
0
1
E/
(
1,
Q
7Q
*Q
(
<
(
A
1
0
2
0
1,2 0
0
0
;
3 3
(
(
3
1
#2
0
/
I
4
<
'
8
'
(
0
0
9
?$ P
*A 6"
R P
K! P (
9
!#
6
1
;
!!2 I
1
2
(
6
0
9
(
0
#
0
" %&3 #
*A 6
0
(6
0
E4
0
(
0
E
#2 (
0
A
0
EFE
E/
C 9
9
0
1
G ;
#"2
1
(
A
0
D
;
;
% #
8
17
$2
0
0 17
0
0
0
"2
;
0
3
;
#;& @
=
0 1
3
1
(
$2
"2
0
(
0
0
(
;
N
0
0
(
(
;
3
7
0
"
0
(
9
/
"
0
0 0
#
03
'
"
/
"
4*4 !
N
(
;
0
(
/
3
0
3
;
0
;
G ;
E
AA61)2E
#"2
(
A
;
8
%
;
0
30
(
;3
1
;
% #
0
0 E
E I >
20
'
3
0
3
0
;
6
;
)
6
0
M
*A 6"
%&3%
E
2
%&3
*A 6"
E
0
*A 6"
-
3
%&3 # (
0
E 1 ;
S 1 ;
2
/
3
AA
AA61)2
'
N
0
0
N
(
3
(
A
9
(
3
6
9
(
0
3
0
3
#
'
#
1
I
0
H ;
1
AAS
2
0
1
7
(
0
$2
3
&
"
"
;
0
/
0
-
)
0
(
=
0
A
)
0
1 ;
"* 2
0
9
5
'
!"
$(
& )#
#"$ #
(
% "$ &
'
0
0
0
0
7
7
B2
&2
6
0
1
E6
"!
!B2
0
0
4 (
' $$
'#
' $$
"$ #
" $ "
" $ "
"
$%
$#(
*# #
*# #
"
*# #
.
0
30
>
"
"$ #
0
0
"
6
' $$
' $$
' $$
" $ "
" $ "
" $ "
*# #
*# #
*# #
3
A
0
2 7
+
,""%+ ,
+%
$%"$
% #,
0
"
%&3% 1
*A 6
%2
(
0
9
0
(
5
7
8 ,9.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
" "
,""-
B2
'
4
3
,:"-
$
; "
, -
<
/
;
;
(
(
(
8
(
0
;
0
1
4
<
&
'
4
0
1
(
#
3 (
#
3 (
(6<
A* ## B
(6
() ! $!3 (6
0
AA1 2 +
)
" %&3 #
*A 6
0
1C
! E8
UC
# 2
1
(
0
M
,
M
I 3:
,
03
,
(
4
@6
'
A
03
2
1 (
(
@6
3
C 3 C
0
@6 (
0
0
1
2
3
A
(
(
"
7
'
&
E4
0
(6
#2 (
A
E
6
1
E
( 9
%2
?"
6
46
9
< E
B& !!"
E
60
0
(
;
0
0
9
;
1
(
0
%&3% 3
*A 6"
;
"& :
E E (
A*
9
$ :1
2
/
0
! #
20
:
$
" :1
0
7
! /
"& :
" :1
0
7
0
0
# /
"& :
$ :1
20
7
0
9
(
0
0
3
0
1 9
2
"
HIS
0
A* * $
%B
0
"
'
% "
&
"
' =
"
"
2.
2>
1,1
2
3 45
M FU/M Netz
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0
20
40
60
80
100
f [Hz]
"%
"
4> %%1
M FU/M Netz
0,9
0,8
A
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
20
40
f [Hz]
60
".
"
%1> 0>>
80
M FU/M Netz
0,9
0,8
A
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0
01 2" #%
6/ 2" #%
10
3 $"$
3 $"$
20
$
$
30
f [Hz]
*
*
40
50
60
45
45
&
2
3 45
26
"
' =
"0
M FU/M Netz
% "
"
2.
2>
1,1
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
A
B
20
"1
40
60
f [Hz]
"
80
100
120
4> %>>
M FU/M Netz
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
A
B
0,4
0,3
0,2
0
20
"2
40
"
60
f [Hz]
80
100
120
%%1 01>
0,9
M FU/M Netz
0,8
0,7
A
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0
01 2" #%
6/ 2" #%
20
3 $"$
3 $"$
40
f [Hz]
$
$
*
*
45
45
60
80
'
1
7
"
'
&
& 8
(
!
D
(
9
B
!
0 7
<
A
0
9
(
#
0
6
(
(6
9
(
,5 1
9
,5 (
# ,5
<
0
A
$3"3 $3 "
&
(
;
>
1 0 7 %8
9
0
9
A
A(
A(
;
(6
1
/
H
9
A
G
$2
0
9
(6
0
0
9
%2
9
0
9
! '
9%)
4
0
9
0
0
BB
0
3% 2
&
9
(6
9
A 6"
%&3 # (
;
3
0
0
(6
0 1/. "%2
(
0
0
'
> ;
%
$ #
##( #
%
$
#( #
!"#" (
$ #"
7
"
+7 7 ,
"$ 89 +
$,
+: : ,
7 " 89 + %,
##(
$ !"#" (
+0 0 ,
$
+
A
1
0
2
0
0
)
A
1
(
0
7
!2
(6
*
(
(
0
)
'
; 12 < $ ( $
1
!/
"$
" $
7
$%
77 $
3
=
" >7 $
3
" $
& & 1)
#( "$
? &? &? 1' $
# (
6 &6 16 3
7) & 7) 1 )7' $$ " $
& & & 1 ? ( % $$ " $
+
"$ ,
C87A)I/3
16 *2
A
A8
A8
$ /
/ @$
?$ $ /
!
*
"
"
7
?$
!!
; 12 < $ ( $
; 1 # (
; 1 )7' " "$ % "
& & & 1)
#( "$ 1
$
& # (& )7' " "$ % "
& - & 1 >-@ 3 (
: & : 1 )7' " "$ % "
&
1 A2 "#
A
&
1 A@$A
? &? &? 1' $
# (
6 &6 16 3
& & & 1? ( %
+
"$ ,
$$
" $
C87A)I/3
16 *2
A
" $ ##( 0
#"
A8
" $ >-@
$ /
% ?$ $ /
!A ;
$
!
"
$
:
"
/ @*
7
?$
!#
'
; 12 < $ ( $
1
!/
"$
"
77 $
3
CQ
4 0 A(
; 1 # (
; 1 )7' " "$ % "
& & 1)
$% $ #
- & -B1 ' $ # #
C
C
2
!"
0
& - & 1 >-@ 3 (
: & : 1 )7' " "$ %
&
1 A2 "#
A
&
1 A@$A
? &? &? 1' $
6 &6 16 3
& & & 1? ( %
+
"$ ,
$%
#( "$
"
# (
$$
" $
C87A)I/3
16 *2
A
" $ ##( 0
#"
A8
" $ >-@
. ?$ $ /
$ /
!A ;
/
!
/ @$
*
"
"
$
$
7
?$
!$
0
;
0
8
;
A
5
;
K! P 3
0
H4
&
A
I
=
0
0
6
0
; A
0
7
A
55
0
0
%2
6
1
!"
55
1
/
(
'
0
(
0
(
0
3
0
(6
1
E4
#2
4
0
0
>
! @6
;
0
!%
'"
"
'"
"
4"
4"
4"
7)
7)
48
48
!B
7)
7)
48
48
)
#
)7'
7 " "$ )7'
)7
" $
.V C $
##
" $ (
" $ (
"$
"$
.V / C $
##
$% $
" "$ % "

3"$ >> + ,;-9
"
)76 $
$
%
"
"
"$ * $%
"$ * $%
" $
* #
D'
0 #
)
'"
"
6 3
"$ # 60 60
$*
$$
% %"
#(
"$ #
#(
* 3 /
'
-* 3
#
%
"$
$$ " $ "
*
% $. .
. C /
7
"$ # 60 60
* * "% %/
'"
"
0$ ! $ #
#( $ *
#" % $
"$ # 60 60 / '
3
#
%
$
"$ # / 7
"$ # 60 60
*
* "% %/
"% $
$
"%
" "$ , * "%
#
% *(
$
/7
"
% " # $
#( "
#(/
* 3 +9'
60 60
$*
$
*
* 3
'"
"
>$
%
"%
* 3 & / /
$
$
#( 9' #
60 +
$(
*
# " (,/
. =. ! &
C #
.
* 3
C #
# /
60 60
7) 7)
7) 7)
48 48
48 48
76 76
6 3
)
#
)7'
.V / C $
7 " "$ )7'
" $ (
"$ "
"$ * $%
" $ (
"$ "
"$ * $%
7
$" "$ 1 "
7
$ (
$
" "$ *
##
$
$ "$
##(& (
"$ # 60 B
$% $%
"$
%
$% $
.
$
"
*
"$ % "
" )76
3"$ >> + ,;-9
" $
* #
D'
!&
0 #
)
'"
"
'"
;
6 3
"
0
$$
" $
6 3
#( "
"$ # 60 60 /
@*
#
%
$
"$ # /
7
"$ # 60 60
* * "% %/
4"
'"
"
'"
"
"% $
$
* 3 +9'
#
"%
" "$ ,
* "% 60 - 60
$*
#
% *(
$
/
7
$
*
"
% " # $
#(
"
* 3
#(/
4"
'"
"
60 60
69 69
7) 7)
7) 7)
48 48
48 48
76 76
'"
"
6 3 +C ,
6 3 +C ,
)
#
)7'
.V / C $
7 " "$ )7'
" $ (
"$ "
"$ * $%
" $ (
"$ "
"$ * $%
7
$" "$ 1 "
7
##
$
.
$
%
$% $
"
*
"$ % "
" )76
3"$ >>+ ,;
" $
* #
D'
. ?
. ' '
M A /
1(/2
9
M A
*A 6"
%&3 #
/
(/
(/
M A
3/
(/
M (
(/
(
E4
#
(
0
8
?
0
$$ @6
K# @6
0
?
" @6
@6
3
@6
.
1
/
E/
#2
1
0
0
3
?
7F4 B$
4
A
&
9
&
0
2 (
;
6 ; "
"
"
0>B
"
2 C 41 B
)
)
" "*#
" "*#
"$
"$
$
$
1 C >> B
?
?
# $
0 C .1 B
?
?
?
?
6
0
3
0
0
0
(
0 4";
(
)
3
9
I* V $
0
A
(
:
I* OQ $
.
4
$4
0
@6 (
(
0
9
0
0
D
;
M 6
A
1 ;
2
A
0
M A
3
0
9
3
M 4
(
*A 6"
9
%&3 #
9
(
;
#!
(
C
0
;
0
3
:
:
0
O!$
*A 6"
!
;
!#3 #
A
?
(
(
0
A
M (
M T
1
E/
(
;
* A 6 " %&3 %
E8
/
=
3 &
+
E
0
D
3
##
;+
(
$
0
;
E
6
E (
9
0
B
0
#
# @6
0
3
(
5 ! $
9
0
0
(
0
(
0
0
3 3
(
9
(
//8 I
; *!
> 7
*
"
"
$
+
+
4>>
"
.2>>
"
D'
D'
#$
D'
(
0
F2
0
$ P
8
)
A
(
0
9
8
0
3
@6
=
(
;
(
0
A
0
$3"
4
0
1AA +2
AA6 (# +
A 6
9
;
(
(
0
0
A
0
;
03
&# & 6
#"
0 )
0
&& & 6
9
;
3
-
0
;
;
D
M I
!2
0
8
I
3
3
M
0
0
H8
/
0
6
9
=
A +
;
S
M A
0
*A 6"
%&3
AA6
W
8
9
/
0
;
W
(
;
0
0
M (
*8C/8T
5
3
0
#%
>
0
(
7
8
4
1
=F3
8T/ #$
-,
7
3
3
0
;
(
2 (
<
3
;
M
0
1 (
AA61)2
0
#
%2
0
9
0
3% 2
;
6
&# & 6
H8
0
0
3
&& &
/
+
=
S
9
;
5
A
5
.
=
9
E8
0
C
>
0
C
*A 6"
#B
<
0
%&3
0
3
'
AA
"
%%)
AAA6 (X @6
<
)
/
0
A "$
0
!
(
0
9
*A 6"
0
%&3!
;
C
(
8
A
3
0
;
0
0
*8C/8T
5
#&
Deutsch: Sollten Sie die Angaben in dieser Betriebsanleitung in der vorliegenden Sprache
nicht lesen knnen, so wenden Sie sich bitte an das Herstellerwerk.
Dansk: Hvis denne brugsanvisning ikke er skrevet p et sprog, som du forstr, s henvend
dig venligst til fabrikanten.
Suomi: Ellette pysty lukemaan tmn kyttohjeen tietoja olemassa olevalla kielell, ottakaa
yhteytt valmistajaan.
Franais: Si vous ne pouvez pas lire la langue dans laquelle sont crites les indications
contenues dans les prsentes instructions de service, veuillez vous adresser au fabricant.
Espaol: Si no puede leer las indicaciones en estas instrucciones de funcionamiento
editadas en el presente idioma, dirjase por favor a la empresa fabricante.
Elinika:
, .
English: If you cannot understand the operating instructions in the language provided please
contact the manufacturers.
Italiano: Se non potete leggere le informazioni contenute nelle istruzioni per luso nella lingua
in cui sono formulate, vi preghiamo di rivolgervi allo stabilimento di produzione.
Nederlands: Wanneer u op grond van de gebruikte taal de gegevens in deze
bedrijfshandleiding niet kunt lezen, verzoeken wij u om contact op te nemen met de fabrikant.
Portugs: Caso no lhe seja possvel compreender as indicaes neste manual de
instrues no presente idioma, queira contactar o fabricante, por favor.
Svenska: Om du inte frstr innehllet i instruktionsboken p det aktuella sprket, kontakta
tillverkaren.
etina: Pokud byste informace v tomto nvodu k obsluze nemohli st ve stvajcm jazyce,
obrate se prosm na vrobce.
Magyar: Ha a hasznlati tmutat adatai ezen a nyelven nem rthetek, akkor krjk,
forduljon a gyrthoz.
Slovenina: V primeru, da podatkov v priloenih navodilih za uporabo v danem jeziku ne
razumete, se obrnite na proizvajalca.
Slovenina: Pokia by ste daje v tomto nvode na pouitie v danom jazyku nevedeli
preta, obrte sa prosm na vrobn zvod.
Lietuvikai: Jei negalite perskaityti ioje naudojimo instrukcijoje tam tikra kalba pateikt
duomen, kreipkits gamintoj.
Latviski: Ja aj lietoanas pamcb informcija sniegta Jums nezinm valod, ldzam
Js vrsties raotjfirm.
Polski: Jeeli nie moecie Pastwo przeczyta instrukcji obsugi w tym jzyku, prosimy o
zwrcenie si z tym do zakadu produkcyjnego.
Eesti: Kui te ei suuda selle tegevusjuhendi andmeid antud keeles lugeda, siis palun
prduge tootjatehase poole.
:
, .
Romn: Dac nu nelegei instruciunile de exploatare n limba n care sunt furnizate, v
rugm s contactai productorul.
ATB NORDENHAM GmbH

Helgolnder Damm 75
26954 Nordenham, Deutschland
Tel. +49 4731 365 0
Fax: +49 4731 365 159
E-Mail: info@atb-nordenham.de
Web: www.atb-nordenham.de
BA 01.07-GB
Erklrung der EG-Konformitt

Declaration of EC-Conformity
Attestation de conformit CE
Wir erklren in alleiniger
Verantwortung, dass
We declare that it is our sole

responsibility that
Nous attestons sous notre

seule responsabilit
Drehstrommotoren
Three-Phase-Motors
Moteurs courant triphas
Typ CD
Type CD
Type CD
auf die sich diese Erklrung

bezieht, den Bestimmungen
der folgenden Richtlinie
entsprechen
to which this declaration

relates is in accordance with
the provision of the
following directives
se rfrant cette attestation

correspondent aux dispositions
des directives suivantes
94/9/EG
94/9/EEC
94/9/CEE
und mit folgenden

Normen bereinstimmen.
and is in conformity with the

following standards.
et sont conformes aux

normes.
EN 60079-0:2012
EN 60079-1:2007
EN 60079-7:2007
EN 60079-31:2009 (nur bei II 2D)
EN 60034-1,5,6,7,8,9,12,14
EN 60079-0:2012
EN 60079-1:2007
EN 60079-7:2007
EN 60079-31:2009 (only at II 2D)
EN 60034-1,5,6,7,8,9,12,14
EN 60079-0:2012
EN 60079-1:2007
EN 60079-7:2007
EN 60079-31:2009 (seulement II 2D)
EN 60034-1,5,6,7,8,9,12,14
Kennzeichnung
Marking
Marquage
0044
II 2G Ex d IIC T3...T6 Gb bzw. Ex de IIC T3...T6 Gb

PTB 08 ATEX 1087 X
oder wahlweise / or optional / ou au choix II 2D Ex tb IIIC T200 C T85 C Db
Das bezeichnete Produkt ist zum Einbau in

eine andere Maschine bestimmt. Die
Inbetriebnahme ist solange untersagt, bis
die Konformitt des Endproduktes mit der
Richtlinie 2006/42/EG festgestellt ist.
The indicated product is intended for

installation into a different machine.
Operation is prohibited until the final
product concurs with the 2006/42/EEC
regulations.
Diese Erklrung ist keine Zusicherung von This statement does not warrant any
Eigenschaften im Sinne der
characteristics regarding product liability.
Produkthaftung.
Die Sicherheitshinweise der
Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten.
Le produit indiqu est prvu pour tre

intgr dans une machine. La mise en
service nest autorise que lorsque la
conformit du produit final selon la
directive 2006/42/CEE a t vrifie.
Cette dclaration ne constitue pas une
assurance des proprits au sens de la
responsabilit produit.
Safety instructions stated in the production Les consignes de scurit rappeles dans la
records have to be adhered to.
documentation du produit doivent tre
respectes.
Mehrere der in der zugehrigen EGMore of the standards stated in the
Baumusterprfbescheinigung genannten
respective EC-Type-Examination
Plusieurs de ces normes appartenant
Normen wurden bereits durch neue
Certificate have already been replaced by
lattestation CE des certificats dessai de
Ausgaben ersetzt. Der Hersteller erklrt fr new editions. The manufacturer
type, ont fait lobjet de nouvelles ditions.
das Produkt die bereinstimmung auch
Le constructeur dclare la conformit du
declares that his product also complies
mit den Anforderungen der neuen
with the requirements of the new editions produit suivant les exigences des nouvelles
Normenausgaben, da entsprechende
normes. Des essais appropris ont t
since the tests has been done.
Prfungen durchgefhrt wurden.
effectus.
Nordenham, den 1. Mai 2013, Ausgabe 6
ATB NORDENHAM GMBH

HELGOLNDER DAMM 75
D-26954 NORDENHAM
Wolfgang Sobel
Leiter Konstruktion
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt
'V' 'T'-
Braunschweig und Berlin
Zertifizierungsstelle, Zertifizierungssektor Explosionsschutz

Physikalisch-TechnischeBundesanstalt,Postfadi33 45,38023 Braunschwei
Ihr Zeidien:
Ihre Nadvicht vom:
Mein Zeichen:
AT6 Motorentechnik GmbH

Herrn Sobel
Helgolnder Damm 75
Meine Nadiriditvom:
ATB2011-10-17.docx
Teleiaxdurchwahl:
Jrg Fltotto
05311592-3599
05311592-693599
E-Mai:
Joerg.floetotto@ptb.de
Bearbeitetvon:
Telefondurchwahl:
26954 Nordenham
EC-Type-Examination Certificate PTB 08 ATEX 1087 X / Three phase motor type CD 315
Dear Mr. Sobel,

we are pleased to confirm that the motor of type CD 315 within the above mentioned certificate
can be operated up to speeds of 5300 rpm.
An additional reference pressure test has been done according to EN 60079-1:2007, clause
15.1.3 with the motor in running (5300 rpm.) and in standstill. A pre compression factor of 1.34
has been applied for admissible ambient temperatures down to -55 "C. Furthermore a dynamic
overpressure test according to clause 15.1.3.2 has been done with Acetylene and Hydrogen.
The required pressures of 1.5 times reference pressure could be achieved for each gas. No
damage of the enclose and no transfer of internal ignition to the outside atmosphere could be
detected.
A static overpressure test according to clause 16.1 and PTB working instruction PL-Ex-1 / 3.5
AA-2.13is required as a routine for the flameproof motor enclosure. For this test a test pressure
of 20 bar has to be applied. In case of admissible motor ambient temperatures below -20 "C
and down to -55 "C this pressure shall be increased to 27 bar.
All the other details of test report PTB Ex 08-18277 and the certificate PTB 08 ATEX 1087X
remain unchanged.
We hope that we could help you with our short statement. In case of any further questions don't
hesitate to contact us.
=sS
Best regards,
Jrg Fltotto
o" Test protocol No.: 2011 / 00241.I

.0 / 2682
O
0
h.
",
Hausadresse, Lleferanschrift
Bundesallee 100
38116 Braunschwelg
DEUTSCHLAND
Telefon: +49 531 592-0

Telefax: +49 531 592-9292
E-Mail: poststelle@ptb.de
Intemet: http:liwww.ptb.de
Achtung neue Bankverblndung ab 25, M a n 2011:

Deutsche Bundesbank, Filiale Leipzig
PTB Berlin-Charlottenburg
BLZ 860 000 00
Abbestr. 2-12
Kto.-Nr.: 860 010 40
IBAN:DE38660000000088001040
10587 Beriin
DEUTSCHLAND
BIC: MARKDEFI860. VAT-Nr.: DE 81 1 240 952

Manual Bomba Duckow

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual Bomba Duckow

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DICKOW PUMPEN KG / Pump Data Sheet - Pump with Shaft Seal

Thermosyphon vessel: acc. to 46.66

Certificate: yes Witnessed:

Certificate: yes Witnessed:

Drawings, Build sheets, Documentation

Language: german / engl

EU-Language IOM: not EU

# Soot; Particle size 50 m, max. 1 mm

Rev.B vom 02.07.14 VK/Hu/we

ATEX - ExII2GcX Kat.: 2 Tempkl.: T1 (05 ATEX D 015)

Operating / Installation Instructions

Pump data sheet

Designation of Warning Notices

signifies an imminent danger.

signifies a possibly dangerous situation.

signifies a possibly dangerous situation.

signifies a possibly harmful situation.

Warning from magnetic field

2.2 Intended use

Operate pump in technically faultless condition only.

Avoidance of foreseeable operating errors

Additional safety regulations

Accident prevention regulations

Safety instructions for the operator / user

Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and

Non-observance of the instruction manual

Endangering of individuals through electrical, thermal, mechanical and chemical impacts.

Notices on explosion protection

Operation in explosive areas requires stringent attention to this

Only pumps with Ex-identification are allowed to be used in

Tmax Surface [C]

* max. operating temperature DICKOW-Metal bellows mechanical seal = 350C

water and watery liquids

Seal faces material code

Temperature on the atmospheric seal component

Allowable temperature of pumped liquid respectively supply fluid

2.9.2 Monitoring devices

special design ; e.g. b = heating jacket

material execution ; e.g. h = 1.4408 / 1.4571

nominal width discharge flange [mm]

nominal impeller diameter [mm]

scope of supply ; e.g. A = bare shaft pump

shaft sealing ; e.g. Ge = standard mechanical seal, balanced

3.3 Classification pump size / frame size

Fig. 1: Name tag German and English

Identification acc. to EC-Explosion Proof Directive

Reference number of technical documentation

Fig. 2: ATEX-Name tag

Dimensions and Weights

4. Handling / Storage / Disposal

4. Handling / Storage / Disposal

Slipping of pump / pump unit from its suspension

Lift the pump / pump unit only in horizontal position.

Fig. 3: lifting the pump

Fig. 4: lifting the complete pump unit

Fig. 5: lifting the pump mounted on base plate

4. Handling / Storage / Disposal

Damage during storage through moisture or dirt.

Outside storage requires a watertight cover over pump or over packed

Wetted, contaminated or damaged openings and joints.

Plugged openings should be uncovered only during installation.

Drain the pump properly considering chapter 7.3.

If required, a Document of Compliance can be downloaded under

4. Handling / Storage / Disposal